Engine Control System PDF

B ENGINE
EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
QR POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ................. 50 F
Description .............................................................. 50
INDEX FOR DTC ...................................................... 15 Component Inspection ............................................ 50
DTC No. Index ....................................................... 15 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM- G
Alphabetical Index .................................................. 18 NATS) ........................................................................ 52
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 22 Description .............................................................. 52
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 53
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- H
Introduction ............................................................. 53
SIONER” ................................................................ 22 Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 53
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 54
A/T .......................................................................... 22 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 67 I
Precaution .............................................................. 22 OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 70
PREPARATION ......................................................... 26 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................... 76
Special Service Tools ............................................. 26 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 76 J
Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 27 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 81
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 28 Procedure After Replacing ECM ............................ 82
System Diagram ..................................................... 28 VIN Registration ..................................................... 82
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 29 K
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 83
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 31 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................ 83
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 83
Speed) .................................................................... 32 Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 85 L
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ..................... 33 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 89
Input/output Signal Chart ....................................... 33 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 89
System Description ................................................ 33 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 95 M
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)... 34 Fail-safe Chart ........................................................ 97
System Description ................................................ 34 Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 98
Component Description .......................................... 35 Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 102
CAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 36 Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 108
System Description ................................................ 36 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 109
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ....................... 37 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 111
Description ............................................................. 37 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................. 111
Component Inspection ........................................... 40 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) ......................... 118
Removal and Installation ........................................ 41 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ...................... 129
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ....................... 41 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor .... 131
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
(ORVR) ...................................................................... 44 Mode ..................................................................... 135
System Description ................................................ 44 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 137
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 45 Description ............................................................ 137
Component Inspection ........................................... 48 Testing Condition .................................................. 137
Revision: September 2006 EC-1 2007 Frontier

Inspection Procedure ............................................ 137 Component Inspection .......................................... 180
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 138 Removal and Installation ....................................... 180
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 181
DENT ....................................................................... 147 Component Description ........................................ 181
Description ............................................................ 147 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 147 Mode ..................................................................... 181
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 148 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 181
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 148 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 182
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 151 Overall Function Check ......................................... 183
Ground Inspection ................................................ 154 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 184
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 156 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 185
Description ............................................................ 156 Component Inspection .......................................... 188
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 156 Removal and Installation ....................................... 189
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 156 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 190
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 157 Component Description ........................................ 190
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 158 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ..................... 159 Mode ..................................................................... 190
Description ............................................................ 159 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 190
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 159 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 191
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 159 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 192
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 160 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 193
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ..................................... 161 Component Inspection .......................................... 195
Description ............................................................ 161 Removal and Installation ....................................... 196
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 197
Mode ..................................................................... 161 Component Description ........................................ 197
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 162 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 197
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 162 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 197
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 163 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 198
Component Inspection .......................................... 164 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 199
Removal and Installation ...................................... 164 Component Inspection .......................................... 200
DTC P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ........ 165 Removal and Installation ....................................... 200
Description ............................................................ 165 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 201
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Description ........................................ 201
Mode ..................................................................... 165 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 201
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 166 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 204
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 167 Component Inspection .......................................... 205
Component Inspection .......................................... 169 Removal and Installation ....................................... 205
Removal and Installation ...................................... 169 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 206
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ..................... 170 Component Description ........................................ 206
Description ............................................................ 170 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 206
Component Inspection .......................................... 175 Removal and Installation ....................................... 212
Removal and Installation ...................................... 175 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 213
DTC P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .... 176 Component Description ........................................ 213
Component Description ........................................ 176 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 213
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 213
Mode ..................................................................... 176 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 214
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 176 Component Inspection .......................................... 215
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 176 Removal and Installation ....................................... 215
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 177 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 216
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 179 Component Description ........................................ 216
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 216

DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 216 DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 258
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 217 Component Description ........................................ 258 A
Component Inspection ......................................... 218 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Removal and Installation ...................................... 218 Mode ..................................................................... 258
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................ 219 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 258 EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 219 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 259
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 219 Overall Function Check ........................................ 260
Component Inspection ......................................... 220 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 262 C
DTC P0130 A/F SENSOR 1 ................................... 221 Removal and Installation ...................................... 267
Component Description ........................................ 221 DTC P0139 HO2S2 ................................................. 268 D
Mode .................................................................... 221 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 221 Mode ..................................................................... 268 E
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 222 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 268
Overall Function Check ........................................ 223 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 269
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 224 Overall Function Check ........................................ 269
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 225 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 271 F
Removal and Installation ...................................... 227 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 272
DTC P0131 A/F SENSOR 1 ................................... 228 Component Inspection .......................................... 274
Component Description ........................................ 228 Removal and Installation ...................................... 275 G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 276
Mode .................................................................... 228 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 276
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 228 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 276 H
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 230 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 280
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 231 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 284
I
Removal and Installation ...................................... 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 284
DTC P0132 A/F SENSOR 1 ................................... 234 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 284
Component Description ........................................ 234 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 286
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 288 J
Mode .................................................................... 234 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 291
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 234 Component Description ........................................ 291
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 234 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 291 K
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 236 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 291
Removal and Installation ...................................... 239 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 294 L
DTC P0133 A/F SENSOR 1 ................................... 240 Component Inspection .......................................... 296
Component Description ........................................ 240 Removal and Installation ...................................... 296
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .......................... 297
Mode .................................................................... 240 Component Description ........................................ 297 M
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 240 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 297
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 241 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 297
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 243 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 298
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 244 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 299
DTC P0137 HO2S2 ................................................. 250 Removal and Installation ...................................... 301
Component Description ........................................ 250 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 302
Mode .................................................................... 250 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 250 Mode ..................................................................... 302
Component Inspection ......................................... 256 Component Inspection .......................................... 308
Removal and Installation ...................................... 257 Removal and Installation ...................................... 308
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS-

FIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 309 UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 362
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 309 Description ............................................................ 362
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 310 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ............................................ 316 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 363
Component Description ........................................ 316 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 363
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 316 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 364
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 316 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 366
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 317 Component Inspection .......................................... 367
Component Inspection .......................................... 319 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
Removal and Installation ...................................... 320 VALVE ...................................................................... 369
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 321 Component Description ........................................ 369
Component Description ........................................ 321 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Inspection .......................................... 327 DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
Removal and Installation ...................................... 327 VALVE ...................................................................... 376
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 328 Component Description ........................................ 376
Component Inspection .......................................... 334 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
Removal and Installation ...................................... 334 SENSOR .................................................................. 382
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION . 335 Component Description ........................................ 382
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 335 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 335 Mode ..................................................................... 382
Overall Function Check ........................................ 336 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 382
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 336 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 383
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 340 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 383
System Description ............................................... 340 Component Inspection .......................................... 384
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 340 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 341 SENSOR .................................................................. 385
Overall Function Check ........................................ 341 Component Description ........................................ 385
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 346 Mode ..................................................................... 385
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 388
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 354 Component Inspection .......................................... 390
Description ............................................................ 354 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor SENSOR .................................................................. 391
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 356 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 391
Component Inspection .......................................... 360 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 393
Removal and Installation ...................................... 361 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 394
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL- Component Inspection .......................................... 397

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 398 DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 435
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 398 Component Description ........................................ 435 A
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 400 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 435
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 405 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 436 EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 405 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 438
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 408 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 439 C
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ...................... 414 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 441
Component Description ........................................ 414 DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH ...................................... 443
On Board Diagnostic Logic .................................. 414 Component Description ........................................ 443 D
Removal and Installation ...................................... 415 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 443 E
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ...................... 416 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 443
Component Description ........................................ 416 Overall Function Check ........................................ 444
On Board Diagnostic Logic .................................. 416 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 445
Overall Function Check ........................................ 416 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 446 F
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 417 DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ................ 449
Removal and Installation ...................................... 417 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 449
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......... 418 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 450 G
On Board Diagnostic Logic .................................. 418 Overall Function Check ........................................ 450
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 418 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 451 H
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 419 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 452
Removal and Installation ...................................... 419 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 453
DTC P0500 VSS ..................................................... 420 Component Description ........................................ 453
I
Description ........................................................... 420 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 453
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 420 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 454
Overall Function Check ........................................ 421 Removal and Installation ...................................... 454 J
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 421 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 455
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 422 Component Description ........................................ 455
Description ........................................................... 422 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 455 K
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 422 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 456
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 423 Removal and Installation ...................................... 456 L
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 424 DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL ................... 457
Description ........................................................... 424 Description ............................................................ 457
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 424 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 457 M
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ..................................... 426 DTC P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ......... 459
Component Description ........................................ 426 Component Description ........................................ 459
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode .................................................................... 426 Mode ..................................................................... 459
Component Inspection ......................................... 430 Component Inspection .......................................... 465
Removal and Installation ...................................... 430 DTC P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR. 466
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ....................... 431 Component Description ........................................ 466
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 432 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 467

Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 469 DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Component Inspection .......................................... 472 RELAY ..................................................................... 515
DTC P1553 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .......... 473 Component Description ........................................ 515
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 476 DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Component Inspection .......................................... 479 FUNCTION .............................................................. 521
DTC P1554 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .......... 480 Description ............................................................ 521
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 521
Mode ..................................................................... 480 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 522
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 480 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 523
Overall Function Check ........................................ 480 Component Inspection .......................................... 526
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 482 Removal and Installation ....................................... 526
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 483 DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 527
Component Inspection .......................................... 486 Component Description ........................................ 527
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 487 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 527
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 528
Mode ..................................................................... 487 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 529
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 489 DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 490 ACTUATOR ............................................................. 532
Component Inspection .......................................... 493 Component Description ........................................ 532
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 494 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 532
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 533
Mode ..................................................................... 494 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 534
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 494 Component Description ........................................ 534
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 496 Mode ..................................................................... 534
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 497 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 534
Component Inspection .......................................... 506 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 535
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 507 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 536
Component Description ........................................ 507 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 537
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 508 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 540
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE Component Description ........................................ 540
REVOLUTION SENSOR) ........................................ 509 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Description ............................................................ 509 Mode ..................................................................... 540
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 540
Mode ..................................................................... 509 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 541
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 510 Component Inspection .......................................... 546
Description ............................................................ 510 Removal and Installation ....................................... 546
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 547

Component Inspection ......................................... 553 Component Inspection .......................................... 608 A
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ..................................... 554 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................. 610
Component Description ........................................ 554 Component Description ........................................ 610 EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 611
Mode .................................................................... 554 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 612
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 554 Removal and Installation ...................................... 614
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 555 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ...................... 615 C
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 557 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 617
Component Inspection ......................................... 560 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 617 D
Removal and Installation ...................................... 560 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 617
DTC P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1 ................................... 561 Calculated Load Value ......................................... 617
Component Description ........................................ 561 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 617 E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 617
Mode .................................................................... 561 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 617
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 561 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 617
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 561 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 617 F
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 563 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 617
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 564 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 617
Removal and Installation ...................................... 569 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 618 G
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................................... 570 Fuel Injector .......................................................... 618
Component Description ........................................ 570 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 618
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor H
Mode .................................................................... 570 VQ
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 571
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 573 INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 619
DTC No. Index ...................................................... 619 I
Component Inspection ......................................... 582
ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 583 Alphabetical Index ................................................ 623
Component Description ........................................ 583 PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 627
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System J
Mode .................................................................... 583 (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 584 SIONER” ............................................................... 627
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 585 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover K
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 586 . 627
Description ........................................................... 586 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor A/T ........................................................................ 627
L
Mode .................................................................... 586 Precaution ............................................................ 628
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 586 PREPARATION ....................................................... 631
FUEL INJECTOR .................................................... 587 Special Service Tools ........................................... 631
Component Description ........................................ 587 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 632 M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 633
Mode .................................................................... 587 System Diagram ................................................... 633
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 588 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 634
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 589 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................. 636
Component Inspection ......................................... 591 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Removal and Installation ...................................... 591 Speed) .................................................................. 637
FUEL PUMP ........................................................... 592 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .................... 638
Description ........................................................... 592 Input/Output Signal Chart ..................................... 638
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor System Description ............................................... 638
Mode .................................................................... 592 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 639
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 593 System Description ............................................... 639
Component Inspection ......................................... 597 CAN COMMUNICATION ......................................... 641
Removal and Installation ...................................... 597 System Description ............................................... 641
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 598 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 642
Component Description ........................................ 598 Description ............................................................ 642
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 599 Component Inspection .......................................... 645

Removal and Installation ...................................... 646 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 766
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 646 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 767
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 768
(ORVR) .................................................................... 649 DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ..................... 769
System Description ............................................... 649 Description ............................................................ 769
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 654 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 770
Description ............................................................ 654 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ......................... 771
Component Inspection .......................................... 654 Description ............................................................ 771
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM- CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
NATS) ...................................................................... 656 Mode ..................................................................... 771
Description ............................................................ 656 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 772
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 657 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 772
Introduction ........................................................... 657 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 773
Two Trip Detection Logic ...................................... 657 Component Inspection .......................................... 774
Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 658 Removal and Installation ....................................... 774
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 672 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1
OBD System Operation Chart .............................. 675 HEATER ................................................................... 775
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 681 Description ............................................................ 775
Basic Inspection ................................................... 681 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................. 686 Mode ..................................................................... 775
Procedure After Replacing ECM .......................... 687 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 775
VIN Registration ................................................... 687 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 775
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .... 688 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 777
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning .............. 688 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 780
Idle Air Volume Learning ...................................... 688 Component Inspection .......................................... 782
Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 690 Removal and Installation ....................................... 782
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 693 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.783
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 693 Description ............................................................ 783
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 699 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 701 Mode ..................................................................... 783
Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 702 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 783
Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 706 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 784
Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 713 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 785
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 714 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 788
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 716 Component Inspection .......................................... 790
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................. 716 Removal and Installation ....................................... 791
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) ......................... 725 DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ...................... 738 VALVE ...................................................................... 792
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor .... 741 Component Description ........................................ 792
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 745 Mode ..................................................................... 792
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 747 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 792
Description ............................................................ 747 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 792
Testing Condition .................................................. 747 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 793
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 747 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 797
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- Removal and Installation ....................................... 798
DENT ....................................................................... 757 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 799
Description ............................................................ 757 Component Description ........................................ 799
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 758 Mode ..................................................................... 799
Ground Inspection ................................................ 765 Overall Function Check ......................................... 801
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 766 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 802
Description ............................................................ 766 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 803
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 766

Component Inspection ......................................... 805 DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 840
Removal and Installation ...................................... 807 Component Description ........................................ 840 A
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ........................ 808 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Description ........................................ 808 Mode ..................................................................... 840
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 840 EC
Mode .................................................................... 808 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 840
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 808 Overall Function Check ........................................ 842
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 810 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 846 C
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 811 Removal and Installation ...................................... 848
Component Inspection ......................................... 813 DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 849
Removal and Installation ...................................... 814 Component Description ........................................ 849 D
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 815 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Description ........................................ 815 Mode ..................................................................... 849
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 815 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 849 E
Component Inspection ......................................... 819 Removal and Installation ...................................... 856 F
Removal and Installation ...................................... 819 DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 857
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ......................... 820 Component Description ........................................ 857
Component Description ........................................ 820 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor G
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 822 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 857 H
Component Inspection ......................................... 824 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 862
I
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ........................... 825 DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 865
Component Description ........................................ 825 Component Description ........................................ 865
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode .................................................................... 825 Mode ..................................................................... 865 J
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 827 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 868 K
Component Inspection ......................................... 831 Removal and Installation ...................................... 876
Removal and Installation ...................................... 831 DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 ..................................... 877 L
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ..................................... 832 Component Description ........................................ 877
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 833 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 877 M
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 833 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 878
Component Inspection ......................................... 834 Overall Function Check ........................................ 878
Removal and Installation ...................................... 834 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 880
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ....................................... 835 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 883
Component Description ........................................ 835 Component Inspection .......................................... 886
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 835 Removal and Installation ...................................... 888
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 835 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ..................................... 889
Component Inspection ......................................... 837 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Removal and Installation ...................................... 837 Mode ..................................................................... 889
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................ 838 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 889
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 838 Overall Function Check ........................................ 891
Component Inspection ......................................... 839 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 895
Removal and Installation ...................................... 902

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ..................................... 903 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 964
Component Description ........................................ 903 Component Inspection .......................................... 966
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Removal and Installation ....................................... 966
Mode ..................................................................... 903 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 967
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 903 Component Description ........................................ 967
Overall Function Check ........................................ 904 Mode ..................................................................... 967
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM Component Inspection .......................................... 973
FUNCTION .............................................................. 915 Removal and Installation ....................................... 973
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 915 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ......... 974
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 915 Component Description ........................................ 974
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 917 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 974
FUNCTION .............................................................. 927 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 975
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 929 Component Inspection .......................................... 982
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 938 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC-
Component Description ........................................ 938 TION ........................................................................ 983
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 940 Overall Function Check ......................................... 984
Component Inspection .......................................... 942 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 989
Removal and Installation ...................................... 942 System Description ............................................... 989
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .......................... 943 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 989
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 943 Overall Function Check ......................................... 990
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 944 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 995
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 947 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
Component Description ........................................ 947 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............................. 1003
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Description ........................................................... 1003
Mode ..................................................................... 947 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 947 Mode ....................................................................
1003
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 948 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1004
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 949 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1004
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 950 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1005
Component Inspection .......................................... 953 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1007
Removal and Installation ...................................... 953 Component Inspection ......................................... 1010
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS- Removal and Installation ...................................... 1010
FIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 954 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL-
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 954 UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .....................1011
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 954 Description ........................................................... 1011
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS ................... 962 Mode ....................................................................
1011
Component Description ........................................ 962 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1012
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 962 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1012
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 962 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1013
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 963 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1015

Component Inspection ........................................1016 Overall Function Check .......................................1057
Removal and Installation .....................................1017 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1058 A
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................1064
VALVE ....................................................................1018 Component Description .......................................1064
Component Description .......................................1018 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1064 EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1064
Mode ...................................................................1018 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1065
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1018 Removal and Installation .....................................1065
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1019 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................1066 C
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1020 Component Description .......................................1066
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1021 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1066
Component Inspection ........................................1023 Overall Function Check .......................................1066 D
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1067
VALVE ....................................................................1025 Removal and Installation .....................................1067
Component Description .......................................1025 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .........1068 E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Description .......................................1068
Mode ...................................................................1025 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1068
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1025 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1068
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1026 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1069 F
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1027 Removal and Installation .....................................1069
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1028 DTC P0500 VSS .....................................................1070
Component Inspection ........................................1029 Description ...........................................................1070 G
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1070
SENSOR ................................................................1031 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1070
Component Description .......................................1031 Overall Function Check .......................................1071 H
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1071
Mode ...................................................................1031 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1072
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1031 Description ...........................................................1072
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1032 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1072
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1032 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1072
Component Inspection ........................................1033 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1073
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1074 J
SENSOR ................................................................1034 Description ...........................................................1074
Component Description .......................................1034 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1074
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1074 K
Mode ...................................................................1034 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1075
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1034 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ....................................1076
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1035 Component Description .......................................1076 L
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1036 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1037 Mode ....................................................................1076
Component Inspection ........................................1039 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1076
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1076 M
SENSOR ................................................................1040 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1077
Component Description .......................................1040 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1078
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Inspection .........................................1080
Mode ...................................................................1040 Removal and Installation .....................................1080
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1040 DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ......................1081
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1041 Component Description .......................................1081
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1042 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1081
Component Inspection ........................................1047 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1082
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ...............1048 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1083
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1048 DTC P0605 ECM ....................................................1085
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1050 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1085
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ...............1055 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1085
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1055 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1086
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1056 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ...............1088
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1088

DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1088 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1122
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1089 Component Inspection ......................................... 1124
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1091 DTC P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR1126
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH .....................................1093 Component Description ....................................... 1126
Component Description .......................................1093 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ....................................................................
1126
Mode ....................................................................1093 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1126
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1093 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1126
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1093 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1128
Overall Function Check .......................................1094 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1129
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1095 Component Inspection ......................................... 1131
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1096 DTC P1553 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .........1133
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ...1099 Component Description ....................................... 1133
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1099 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .........................1100 Mode ....................................................................
1133
Description ...........................................................1100 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1133
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1100 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1133
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1100 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1135
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1100 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1136
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ...........1101 Component Inspection ......................................... 1138
Description ...........................................................1101 DTC P1554 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .........1140
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1101 Component Description ....................................... 1140
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1101 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1101 Mode ....................................................................
1140
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE .......1102 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1140
Description ...........................................................1102 Overall Function Check ........................................ 1140
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1142
Mode ....................................................................1103 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1143
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1104 Component Inspection ......................................... 1145
Overall Function Check .......................................1104 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ...............1147
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1106 Component Description ....................................... 1147
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1108 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ..........................1111 Mode ....................................................................
1147
Component Inspection .........................................1112 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1147
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................1113 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1148
Component Description .......................................1113 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1149
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1113 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1150
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1113 Component Inspection ......................................... 1153
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1114 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .....................1154
Removal and Installation .....................................1114 Component Description ....................................... 1154
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................1115 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Description .......................................1115 Mode ....................................................................
1154
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1115 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1154
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1115 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1155
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1116 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1156
Removal and Installation .....................................1116 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1157
DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL ..................1117 Component Inspection ......................................... 1165
Description ...........................................................1117 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ....1167
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1117 Component Description ....................................... 1167
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1117 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1167
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1117 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1167
DTC P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .........1119 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1168
Component Description .......................................1119 DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor REVOLUTION SENSOR) .......................................1169
Mode ....................................................................1119 Description ...........................................................1169
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1119 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1119 Mode ....................................................................
1169
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1121 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1169
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1169

DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1170 Component Inspection .........................................1204
Component Description .......................................1170 Removal and Installation .....................................1204 A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................1205
Mode ...................................................................1170 Component Description .......................................1205
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1170 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1170 Mode ....................................................................1205
Component Inspection ........................................1173 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1207 C
Removal and Installation .....................................1174 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1208
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ...............................1175 Component Inspection .........................................1211
Description ..........................................................1175 Removal and Installation .....................................1211 D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................1212
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1175 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor E
Component Inspection ........................................1179 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1214 F
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1215
RELAY ...................................................................1180 Component Inspection .........................................1218
Component Description .......................................1180 Removal and Installation .....................................1218 G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ....................................1219
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1180 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor H
I
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Wiring Diagram ....................................................1221
FUNCTION .............................................................1186 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1222
Description ..........................................................1186 Component Inspection .........................................1225
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1186 Removal and Installation .....................................1225 J
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1186 DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 .....................1226
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1187 Component Description .......................................1226
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1188 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor K
Component Inspection ........................................1191 Mode ....................................................................1226
Removal and Installation .....................................1191 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1226
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .......1192 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1226 L
Component Description .......................................1192 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1228
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1192 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1231
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1192 Removal and Installation .....................................1237
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1193 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ........................................1238 M
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1194 Component Description .......................................1238
Component Inspection ........................................1195 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Removal and Installation .....................................1196 Mode ....................................................................1238
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Wiring Diagram ....................................................1239
ACTUATOR ...........................................................1197 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1241
Component Description .......................................1197 Component Inspection .........................................1250
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1197 ASCD INDICATOR .................................................1252
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1198 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .......................1199 Mode ....................................................................1252
Component Description .......................................1199 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1253
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1254
Mode ...................................................................1199 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ...............................1255
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1199 Description ...........................................................1255
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1200 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1201 Mode ....................................................................1255
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1202 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1255

FUEL INJECTOR ...................................................1257 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1285
Component Description .......................................1257 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1287
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor VIAS ........................................................................
1288
Mode ....................................................................1257 Description ........................................................... 1288
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1258 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1259 Mode ....................................................................1289
Component Inspection .........................................1263 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1290
Removal and Installation .....................................1263 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1292
FUEL PUMP ...........................................................1264 Component Inspection ......................................... 1295
Description ...........................................................1264 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1296
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................... 1297
Mode ....................................................................1264 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1297
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1265 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ... 1299
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1266 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 1299
Component Inspection .........................................1268 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................ 1299
Removal and Installation .....................................1269 Calculated Load Value ......................................... 1299
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................1270 Mass Air Flow Sensor .......................................... 1299
Component Description .......................................1270 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 1299
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1271 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .................. 1299
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1276 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater ................... 1299
Component Inspection .........................................1281 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater ......................... 1299
Removal and Installation .....................................1282 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ...................... 1299
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................1283 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 1299
Component Description .......................................1283 Throttle Control Motor .......................................... 1299
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1284 Fuel Injector ......................................................... 1300
Fuel Pump ............................................................ 1300

INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
A
DTC No. Index UBS00L28
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
● If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . C
DTC*1
Items
CONSULT-II Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
2 ECM*3 D
GST*
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-156
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-156 E

U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) EC-159
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — F
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-161
P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-165
G
P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-165

P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-170 H
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-170
P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-176
P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-181 I
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-190
J
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-197
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-201 K
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-201
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-206
L
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-206
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-213
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR EC-216 M
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-219
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-221
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-228
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-234
P0133 0133 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-240
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-250
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-258
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-268
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-276
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-284
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-291
P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-297

INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-302
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-302
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-309
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-309
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-316
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-321
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-328
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-335
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-340
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-346
P0443 0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-354
P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-369
P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-382
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-398
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-405
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-414
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-416
P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-418
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 EC-420
P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM EC-422
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-426
P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-431
P0605 0605 ECM EC-435
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-438
P0700 0700 TCM AT-105
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-106
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-128
P0717 0717 TURBINE SENSOR AT-110
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 AT-112
P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-117
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-119

INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*3
GST*2
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-121 EC
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-123
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-443
P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-449 C
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-450
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING EC-453
D
P1421 1421 COLD START CONTROL EC-457
P1550 1550 BAT CURRENT SENSOR EC-459 E
P1551 1551 BAT CURRENT SENSOR EC-466
F
P1564 1564 ASCD SW EC-487 G
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-494
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN EC-507
H
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-52
P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-125
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED EC-509 I
P1730 1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-135
P1752 1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-140
P1754 1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-142
J
P1757 1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-144
P1759 1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-146
K
P1762 1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-148
P1764 1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-150
P1767 1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-152 L
P1769 1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-154
P1772 1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-156
M
P1774 1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-158
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-510
P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR EC-515
P2101 2101 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-521
P2118 2118 ETC MOT EC-527
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR EC-532
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-534
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-547

INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-554
P2A00 2A00 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-561
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
Alphabetical Index UBS00L29
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
DTC*1
Items
ECM*3
GST*2
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 EC-221
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 EC-228
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-234
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 EC-240
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 EC-561
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 EC-165
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 EC-165
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 AT-135
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 AT-121
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-534
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-554
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 EC-494
ASCD SW P1564 1564 EC-487
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 EC-507
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 AT-128
BAT CURRENT SENSOR P1550 1550 EC-459
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-510
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 EC-156

CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-321

INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*3
GST*2
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 EC-449 EC
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 EC-328
COLD START CONTROL P1421 1421 EC-457
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 EC-159 C
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 EC-453
D
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 EC-309
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 EC-309 E
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 AT-148
F
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 AT-150
ECM P0605 0605 EC-435
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 EC-431 G
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 EC-201
H
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 EC-213
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-450
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 AT-117 I
ETC ACTR P2119 2119 EC-532
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P2101 2101 EC-521
ETC MOT P2118 2118 EC-527
J
ETC MOT PWR P2100 2100 EC-515
K
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 EC-398
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 EC-340
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 EC-346 L
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 EC-382
M
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 EC-405
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 AT-144
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 AT-146
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 EC-297
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 EC-291
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 EC-414
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 EC-416
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 EC-418
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 EC-276
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 EC-284

INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 AT-154
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 AT-152
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 EC-250
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-258
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-268
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 EC-170
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 EC-170
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 AT-140
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 AT-142
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 EC-197
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 EC-216
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 EC-509
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 EC-161
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 EC-176
ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 EC-422
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-316
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 AT-123
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 AT-158
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 AT-156
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 EC-181
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-309
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EC-52
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 EC-443
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 AT-106
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 EC-354
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 EC-426
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 EC-438
TCM P0700 0700 AT-105
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 AT-119
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 EC-219
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-302
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-302
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-206

INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*3
GST*2
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-206 EC
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-547
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 AT-125
TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 AT-110 C
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 EC-335
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 AT-112

D
5 P0500 0500 EC-420
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 EC-369
E
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. F
G

PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” UBS00L2A
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T UBS00L2B
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-83, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution UBS00L2C
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned OFF.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H

PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
● Do not disassemble ECM.
● If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to A
the initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is dis- EC
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
● If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-
C
related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
PBIB1164E
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes D
– Freeze frame data
– 1st trip freeze frame data
– System readiness test (SRT) codes E
– Test values
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the fig- F
ure.
PBIB1512E
I
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break). J
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors. K
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
L
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc. M
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
● Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly. Refer to EC-111, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value"
.
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents. MEF040D
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).

PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SEF217U
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SEF348N
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
BBIA0529E

PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces- A
sarily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
EC
SEF709Y
D
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure
to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location. E
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away F
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing- G
wave radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
H

PREPARATION
[QR]
PREPARATION PFP:00002
Special Service Tools UBS00L2E
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
EG17650301 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and ra-
(J-33984-A) diator filler neck
Radiator cap tester a: 28 (1.10) dia.
adapter b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor

(J-36471-A) with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
S-NT379
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor

(J-38365) a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
wrench
S-NT636
(J-44321) Checking fuel pressure

Fuel pressure gauge
kit
LEC642
(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connec-

Fuel pressure gauge tor type fuel lines.
adapter
LBIA0376E
(J-44626) Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

Air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor wrench
LEM054
(J-45488) Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine

Quick connector re- room.
lease
PBIC0198E

PREPARATION
[QR]
Commercial Service Tools UBS00L2F
A
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak
EC
i.e.:(J-41416)
S-NT703
D
EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
adapter port
i.e.:(J-41413-OBD)
E
S-NT704 F
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (J-41416) pressure
G
H
S-NT815
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor I
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before K

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor L
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
M
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907)
S-NT779

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
System Diagram UBS00L2G
PBIB2653E

[QR]
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System UBS00L2H
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3 EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature C
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
D
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Fuel injection & mixture
Fuel injector
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition ratio control
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation E
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

F
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2
G
Battery Battery voltage*3
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
H
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of I
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
J
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat- K
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up L
● When starting the engine
● During acceleration
● Hot-engine operation M
● When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation

[QR]
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-221, "DTC P0130 A/F SENSOR 1" . This maintains the mixture ratio
within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
● Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN com-
pared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and
an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

[QR]
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
A
EC
SEF337W D
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used E
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
F
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. G
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper- H
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System UBS00L2I
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART I

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2
J
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature K
Throttle position sensor Throttle position Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control
L
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*1 M
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
● At starting
● During warm-up
● At idle
● At low battery voltage

[QR]
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) UBS00L2J
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Fuel cut control Fuel injector
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-29, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System"
.

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
[QR]
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL PFP:23710
A
Input/output Signal Chart UBS00L2K

Air conditioner switch 1 EC
Air conditioner ON signal*
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure D
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
E
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. F
System Description UBS00L2L
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
G
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine. H
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. I
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
J

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[QR]
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930
System Description UBS00L2M

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) Clutch pedal operation
Electric throttle control
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation ASCD vehicle speed control
actuator
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Combination meter Vehicle speed*
TCM (A/T models) Powertrain revolution*
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press ASCD MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed
until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
● CANCEL switch is depressed
● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
● Brake pedal is depressed
● Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models)
● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T models)
● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.

[QR]
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the A
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
EC
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN
switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition
must meet following conditions.
● Brake pedal is released C
● Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models)
D
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
Component Description UBS00L2N
ASCD STEERING SWITCH E

Refer to EC-487 .
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
F
Refer to EC-494 and EC-570 .
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-494 and EC-570 . G
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-494 , EC-510 and EC-570 .
H
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EC-515 , EC-521 , EC-527 and EC-532 .
ASCD INDICATOR I
Refer to EC-583 .
J

CAN COMMUNICATION
[QR]
CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
System Description UBS00L2O
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-48, "CAN System Specification Chart" , about CAN communication for detail.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
A
Description UBS00L2P
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB2037E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel H
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. I
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. J
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.

[QR]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
PBIB2654E

[QR]
EC
BBIA0594E

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00L2Q
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
BBIA0639E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF445Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa
(0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa
(−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor-
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF943S
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

[QR]
EVAP SERVICE PORT
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP A
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
EC
SEF462UC
D
Removal and Installation UBS00L2R
EVAP CANISTER E
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
K
BBIA0566E

1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. L
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
M
BBIA0567E
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage UBS00L2S
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
● Do not start engine.
● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.

[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
PEF838U
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure

indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
PEF917U
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPO-

RATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
2. Attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP ser-
vice port adapter.
SEF462UC

[QR]
3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister
vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system. A
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system
until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to
0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). EC
pump.
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPO- C
RATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
BBIA0591E

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[QR]
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) PFP:00032
System Description UBS00L2T
PBIB1068E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
● Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
– Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
– Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-85, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
– Disconnect battery ground cable.
● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L2U
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. A
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sen-
sor attached. C
The weight should be less than 2.0 kg (4.4 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
F
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
H
BBIA0558E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

J
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
L
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

M
Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

[QR]
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
sor attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
BBIA0558E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES

Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, loose-
ness and improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE

Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.

[QR]
7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE C

Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I E
Check one-way valve for clogging.

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
G
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
H
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close. I
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END J
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
K
SEF665U

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00L2V
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" .
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
BBIA0568E
Without CONSULT-II
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.

[QR]
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. A
EC
BBIA0568E
G

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[QR]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
Description UBS00L2W
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB0492E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection UBS00L2X
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E

[QR]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. A
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
EC
S-ET277
D

NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
[QR]
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) PFP:25386
Description UBS00L2Y
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-119, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem-NATS)" .
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is dis-
played before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system
and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be SEF543X
carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS
(NATS) initialization and all NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, IVIS/NVIS.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
A
Introduction UBS00L2Z
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: EC
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979
C
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979 D
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979 E
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
F
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × × × × —
G
GST × × × — × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. H
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-97,
"Fail-safe Chart" .) I
Two Trip Detection Logic UBS00L30
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the J
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd K
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable L
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip M
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing
Misfire (Possible three way cata-

lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - × — — — — — × —
P0304 is being detected
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - — — × — — × — —
One trip detection diagnoses
— × — — × — — —
(Refer to EC-54 .)
Except above — — — × — × × —
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.

[QR]
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information UBS00L31
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

DTC*1 Test value/

Items MIL Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit Trip
(CONSULT-II screen terms) lighting up page
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
1 (A/T) × (A/T)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*6 — —
2 (M/T) — (M/T)
EC-156
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*6 — — 2 — EC-156

1 (A/T) × (A/T)
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 — — EC-159
2 (M/T) — (M/T)
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — Flashing*7 EC-68
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — 2 × EC-161
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — × 2 × EC-165
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — × 2 × EC-165
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — × 2 × EC-170
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — × 2 × EC-170
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 — — 2 × EC-176
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — 2 × EC-181
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — 2 × EC-197
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-201
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-201
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-206
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-206
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — 2 × EC-213
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — 2 × EC-216
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — 2 × EC-219
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — × 2 × EC-221
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — × 2 × EC-228
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — × 2 × EC-234
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 × × 2 × EC-240
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × × 2 × EC-250
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × × 2 × EC-258
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-268
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — 2 × EC-276
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — 2 × EC-284
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — 2 × EC-291
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — 2 × EC-297

[QR]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items MIL Reference A
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-302 EC
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-302
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 2 × EC-309
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 2 × EC-309 C
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — 2 × EC-309
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 2 × EC-309
D
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — 2 × EC-309
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — 2 — EC-316
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — 2 — EC-316 E
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-321
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-328
F
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × 2 × EC-335
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × 2 × EC-340
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × 2 × EC-346 G
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 — — 2 × EC-354
H
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — 2 × EC-369
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0448 0448 — — 2 × EC-376 I
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — 2 × EC-382
J
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — — 2 × EC-398
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×* 4 × 2 × EC-405 K
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — 2 × EC-414
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — 2 × EC-416
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — 2 × EC-418
L
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* 5 P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-420 M

ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — 2 × EC-422
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — 2 × EC-424
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — 2 — EC-426
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 — — 2 × EC-431
ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-435
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 — — 1 × EC-438
TCM P0700 0700 — — 1 × AT-105
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — 2 × AT-106
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — 2 × AT-128
TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 — — 2 × AT-110
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT* 5 P0720 0720 — — 2 × AT-112

ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 — — 2 × AT-117
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — 2 × AT-119

[QR]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items MIL Reference
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — 2 × AT-121
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — 2 × AT-123
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — — 2 × EC-443
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — 1 × EC-449
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-450
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-453
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-455
COLD START CONTROL P1421 1421 — — 2 × EC-457
BAT CURRENT SENSOR P1550 1550 — — 2 — EC-459
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — 1 — EC-487
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — 1 — EC-494
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — 1 — EC-507
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 — — 2 — EC-52
TPV SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 — — 1 × AT-125
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 — — 2 — EC-509
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — — 1 × AT-135
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — — 1 × AT-140
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 — — 1 × AT-142
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 — — 1 × AT-144
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — — 1 × AT-148
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 — — 1 × AT-150
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — — 1 × AT-152
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 — — 1 × AT-154
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — — 1 × AT-156
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — — 1 × AT-158
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-510
ETC MOT PWR P2100 2100 — — 1 × EC-515
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P2101 2101 — — 1 × EC-521
ETC MOT PWR P2103 2103 — — 1 × EC-515
ETC MOT P2118 2118 — — 1 × EC-527
ETC ACTR P2119 2119 — — 1 × EC-532
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-534
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-534
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-540
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-540
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-547

[QR]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items MIL Reference A
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-554 EC
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — × 2 × EC-561
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. C
*3: In Diagnostic Test Made II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.
*6: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. D
*7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-62, "How to Display SRT Status" .
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

E
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not F
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, G
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. H
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-66, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-54, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC I
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
J
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-90, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confir- K
mation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC L
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
WITH CONSULT-II
WITH GST M
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
NO TOOLS
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].

[QR]
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-58, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-54, "EMISSION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
[QR]
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the A
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even EC
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
C

[QR]
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
Perfor-
SRT item Corresponding DTC
mance Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
(CONSULT-II indication) No.
Priority*
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420
1 EVAP control system P0442
EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system P0456
2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137
HO2S 1
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II.
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:

[QR]
● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. A
● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. EC
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. C
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
D
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
PBIB2320E
*1 EC-57 *2 EC-62 *3 EC-62

[QR]
How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
NOTE:
Though displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SEF935Z
SRT item.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
PBIB2317E
How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-60, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

[QR]
Driving Pattern
A
EC
PBIB2906E

[QR]
● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
● Sea level
● Flat road
● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
● Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
● Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-
state driving.
● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all
over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for PBIB2244E
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models

Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
For quick acceleration in low altitude
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
areas and high altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd 17 (11) 20 (12) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 25 (15) 37 (23) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 38 (24) 54 (34) 64 (40)
4th to 5th 55 (35) 71 (44) 75 (45)

[QR]
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. A
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high-
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi-
tions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
EC
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
Gear km/h (MPH)
1st 50 (30) C
2nd 90 (55)
3rd —
4th — D
5th —
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II) E
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the F
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
G
Test value (GST dis-
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC play) Test limit Conversion
TID CID
H
P0420 01H 01H Max. 1/128
CATALYST Three way catalyst function
P0420 02H 81H Min. 1
EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 I
EVAP
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20 mV
SYSTEM
EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 J
P0131 41H 8EH Min. 5 mV
P0132 42H 0EH Max. 5 mV
P2A00 43H 0EH Max. 0.002 K
P2A00 44H 8EH Min. 0.002
A/F sensor 1
P0133 45H 8EH Min. 0.004
L
P0130 46H 0EH Max. 5 mV
HO2S
P0130 47H 8EH Min. 5 mV
P0133 48H 8EH Min. 0.004 M
P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500 ms
P0137 1AH 86H Min. 10 mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0138 1BH 06H Max. 10 mV
P0138 1CH 06H Max. 10 mV
P0032 57H 10H Max. 5 mV
A/F sensor 1 heater
HO2S P0031 58H 90H Min. 5 mV
HEATER P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20 mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20 mV

[QR]
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
With CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individ-
ually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
SCIA5334E
With GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

[QR]
2. Perform AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). A
No Tools
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. EC
C
2. Perform AT-42, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-68, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
D
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
E
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
– Freeze frame data F
– System readiness test (SRT) codes
– Test values G
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
H
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) UBS00L32
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
I
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-31, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-615, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" . J
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction. K
SEF217U
L

[QR]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
The on board diagnostic system has the following 3 functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
ON position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
● One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
MIL Flashing Without DTC

When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-62, "How to Display
SRT Status" .
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.

[QR]
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this A
10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For
the details, refer to EC-62, "How to Display SRT Status" .
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal. EC
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
C
F
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-68, "How to Set Diagnostic Test G
Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. H
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
I
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-
31, "WARNING LAMPS" .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING J
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction K
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS L

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL M
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.

[QR]
PBIB3005E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The “A” id indicated by the number of eleven flash. The length of time the
1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second)
cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
The DTC can be erased from the back-up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
69, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart UBS00L33
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-53, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .
● The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction
occurs while counting, the counter will reset.

[QR]
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and A
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
EC
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other C
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
display)
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) D
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)

1st Trip Freeze Frame Data E
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-73, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS
FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see EC-75, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE F
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip. G

[QR]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- detected in two consecutive trips, the
MIL will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
freeze frame data will be cleared. without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.

[QR]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-
TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. EC
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”) C
<Driving Pattern C>

Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: D
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: E
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F). F
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) G
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F) H
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. I
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
J

[QR]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
SEF393SD
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.

[QR]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
<Driving Pattern A>
EC
G
AEC574
● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. H
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
I
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
J
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).
K

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
Basic Inspection UBS00L34
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U
– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.

[QR]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED A
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
EC
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
E
PBIA8513J
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

Refer to EC-81, "IDLE SPEED" . F
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
G
SEF058Y
I
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about J
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-81, "IDLE SPEED" .
K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
M
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.

[QR]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-83, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Refer to EC-81, "IDLE SPEED" .
Without CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.

Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-328, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR
(PHASE)" .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-321, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-121, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.

[QR]
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING A
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-81, "IGNI-
TION TIMING" . EC
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)

A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 11. D
BBIA0633E
E
1. Stop engine.
F
>> GO TO 12. G

Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . H
>> GO TO 13.
I
Refer to EC-83, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14. K
2. GO TO 4.
L
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. M
Without CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.

[QR]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-81, "IGNI-
TION TIMING" .
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19
NG >> GO TO 16.
BBIA0633E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.

● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-328, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR
(PHASE)" .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-321, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
2. GO TO 4.

>> GO TO 4.
19. INSPECTION END

Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?
Yes or No
Yes >> 1. Perform EC-82, "VIN Registration" .
2. INSPECTION END
No >> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check UBS00L35
IDLE SPEED A
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC
SEF058Y
E
With GST
Check idle speed in Service $01 with GST.
IGNITION TIMING F
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A G
1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
BBIA0644E
2. Check ignition timing. K
BBIA0633E
Method B
1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
BBIA0604E

[QR]
2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this
wire.
BBIA0605E
SEF166Y
3. Check ignition timing.
BBIA0633E
Procedure After Replacing ECM UBS00S4L
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.

2. Perform EC-82, "VIN Registration" .
4. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-83, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
VIN Registration UBS00S4M
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-48, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" .
2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.

[QR]
3. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. A
EC
PBIB2242E
D
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning UBS00S4N
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
E
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE F
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
H
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning UBS00S4O
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
I
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE J
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. K
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning UBS00S4P
DESCRIPTION L
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. M
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 203°F)
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started the headlamp will not be illuminated.
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up

[QR]
– A/T models
• With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9V.
• Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
– M/T models: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF217Z
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
SEF454Y
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If

“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Refer to
EC-81, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" .
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) MBIB0238E
Ignition timing M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)

Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
has a malfunction.

[QR]
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
EC
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. C
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON. D
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds. E
H
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications. Refer to EC-81, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" . I
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) J
K
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE below.
L
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. M
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-137, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check UBS00S4Q
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-II

[QR]
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
SEF214Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
pressure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
BBIA0534E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because D40 models do not have fuel return system.
Method A
CAUTION:
● The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for
other purposes.
● Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, A/C, etc.) Fuel
pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes in manifold
vacuum.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-85, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.

[QR]
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure.
● Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist- A
ened with gasoline.
● Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
and No.1 spool. EC
● Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube.
● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439- C
N4710 or 16439-40U00).
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. PBIB0669E
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for D
damage and abnormality.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 E

in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m,
F
9 - 13 in-lb)
● Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose G
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off.
6. Turn ignition switch ON, and check for fuel leakage. H
BBIA0606E
7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false I
readings.
● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
J
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following. K
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
● Fuel filter for clogging

L
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. M
If NG, repair or replace.
Method B
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector o-ring maintains sealability.
● Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND
FUEL TUBE" .
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep fuel hose connections clean.

[QR]
3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pres-
sure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in the figure.
● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pres-
sure gauge adapter.
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for
fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. BBIA0607E
● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel
connection every 3 minutes.

8. Check the following.
● Fuel pump
If OK, replace fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to EC-85, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction UBS00L3C
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con- EC
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac- C
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
E
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are F
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
G
SEF233G
I
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the WORK FLOW on EC-90, "WORK FLOW" . J
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under K
what conditions they occur. A DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET like the
example on EC-94, "Worksheet Sample" should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. L
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.
M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence
PBIB2267E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Detailed Flow
A
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-93, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . EC
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK DTC* 1
1. Check DTC*1 . D
1
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC* is displayed.
1 2
– Record DTC* and freeze frame data* . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.)
E
– Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-66, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .)
– Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus- F
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-98, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? G
1
Symptom is described, DTC* is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
H
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

I
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode and check real time diagnosis
J
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
K
>> GO TO 5.

L
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
M
results.
>> GO TO 6.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1 , and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-95, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
● Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this
check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No >> Check according to EC-147, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION

Perform EC-76, "Basic Inspection" .
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F
ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA
MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-137, "TROUBLE DIAGNO-
SIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Are they within the SP value?
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8.
SEF601Z
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-138, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-98, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection EC
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-
27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Is malfunctioning part detected? C
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-131, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" , EC-111, "ECM Ter- D
minals and Reference Value" .
11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART

E
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment. F
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-66, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION" .
G
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK H

When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure I
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
J
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-66, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION- K
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC-
63, "Driving Pattern" . L
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data. M
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L
● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
DTC Inspection Priority Chart UBS00L3D
A
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for EC
DTC U1000 and U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line D
● U1010 CAN communication
● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor E
● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
● P0128 Thermostat function F
● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) G
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor H
● P0605 ECM
● P0643 Sensor power supply
● P0700 TCM I
● P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P0850 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P1610 - P1615 NATS J
● P1550 P1551 P1552 P1553 P1554 Battery current sensor
● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
K

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
2 ● P0031 P0032 A/F sensor 1 heater
● P0037 P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● P0075 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
● P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P2A00 A/F sensor 1
● P0137 P0138 P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
● P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
● P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
● P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
● P0603 ECM power supply
● P0710 P0717 P0720 P0725 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0740 P0744 P0745 P0750 P0755 P1705 P1730 P1752
P1754 P1757 P1759 P1760 P1762 P1764 P1767 P1769 P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors and solenoid valves
● P1805 Brake switch
● P2101 Electric throttle control function
● P2100 P2103 P2118 Electric throttle control actuator
3 ● P0011 Intake valve timing control
● P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
● P0300 - P0304 Misfire
● P0420 Three way catalyst function
● P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK)
● P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
● P1148 Closed loop control
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
● P1421 Cold start control
● P1564 ASCD steering switch
● P1572 ASCD brake switch
● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
● P1715 Turbine revolution sensor
● P2119 Electric throttle control actuator

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Fail-safe Chart UBS00L3E
A
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch ON or START.
C
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-
Condition
II display)
D
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or START
More than approx. 4 minutes after
ignition ON or START
80°C (176°F) E
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)

Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
F
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cool-
ing fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0123 in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. G
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the nor-
P0223 mal condition.
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
H
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a I
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
tion fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
J
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2119 Electric throttle control actu- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
K
ator spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:) L
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to
20 degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) M
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in P or N (A/T), neutral position (M/T), and engine speed will not
exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P2123 sensor in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the nor-
P2128 mal condition.
● When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously
detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit
is open by means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Symptom Matrix Chart UBS00L3F
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-592
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-85
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-587
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-37
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-50
tem
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-76
EC-515,
EC-521 ,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-527 ,
EC-532
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-76
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-598
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-148
EC-181,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-190
EC-201,
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 2
EC-213
EC-206,
EC-302 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-453 ,
EC-455 ,
EC-547
EC-438,
EC-534 ,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 2 2
EC-540 ,
EC-554
EC-221,
EC-228 ,
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-234 ,
EC-240 ,
EC-561
Knock sensor circuit 2 2 3 EC-316
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-321
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 2 2 EC-328

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

F
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-420
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-426
EC-431, G
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-435
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-176
cuit
H
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-443
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 4 EC-610
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-586 I
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 MTC-28
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page) J

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel tank FL-12
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-29
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
line, Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-16
Air cleaner EM-16
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor —electric EM-16
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-18
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-18
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-25
Starter circuit 3 SC-10
Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM-75
Park/neutral position (PNP) MT-11 or
4
switch AT-106
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-60
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-75
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

F
Valve Timing chain EM-48
mecha-
Camshaft EM-36
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-48 G
Intake valve
3 EM-60
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
H
Gasket EM-21, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
4
Three way catalyst
I
Lubrica- EM-23, LU-
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion 9 , LU-10 ,
filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 LU-4
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-6 J
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-15
Thermostat 5 CO-21
K
Water pump CO-19
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 5 CO-8
Cooling fan 5 CO-18 L
Coolant level (low)/Contami-
CO-10
nated coolant
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System BL-119, M
1 1
— NATS) EC-52

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Engine Control Component Parts Location UBS00L3G
BBIA0608E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
BBIA0609E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
BBIA0638E
BBIA0610E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
BBIA0611E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
BBIA0645E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
BBIA0640E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Vacuum Hose Drawing UBS00L3H
PBIB2655E
Refer to EC-28, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Circuit Diagram UBS00L3I
EC
BBWA2407E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
BBWA2408E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout UBS00L3J
EC
PBIB1192E D
ECM Terminals and Reference Value UBS00L3K
PREPARATION E
ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir
tank.
F
H
BBIA0537E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. I
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- J
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) K
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 BR ECM ground Body ground
● Idle speed L
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running] M
2 Y A/F sensor 1 heater ● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE

3 V [Ignition switch: ON]
supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]

Throttle control motor ● Engine: Stopped
4 L/W
(Close) ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
PBIB0534E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

5 L/B
(Open) ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIB0533E
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Warm-up condition
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 10V
Intake valve timing control
11 LG
solenoid valve [Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.0V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel: Being turned
12 P
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel: Not being turned
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on
rpm at idle.
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB0527E
13 G
(POS)
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0528E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running] EC
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
rpm at idle.
PBIB0525E
Camshaft position sensor
14 Y D
(PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running] E
F
PBIB0526E
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed G
16 V Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
35 O Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition H
56 W Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 L Approximately 2.3V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Idle speed J
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
22 LG Fuel injector No. 3 K
PBIB0529E
23 SB Fuel injector No. 1
41 R Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
42 O Fuel injector No. 2
(11 - 14V) L
[Engine is running]
M
PBIB0530E
[Engine is running] Approximately 5V

● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
25 P
heater minute under on load
SEC981D

● Engine: Stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
EVAP control system pres-
32 GR [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
sure sensor
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature
34 BR [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sensor
air temperature.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
● Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
EVAP canister purge volume PBIB0050E

45 R
control solenoid valve
Approximately 1V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB2652E
Sensor power supply

47 L [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)
Sensor power supply
48 SB (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure
49 P [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor, Battery current sen-
sor)
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 0.9 - 1.2V
● Idle speed
51 P Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running] EC
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
61 L Ignition signal No. 3 rpm at idle.
PBIB0521E
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1
80 GR Ignition signal No. 4 D
0 - 0.2V
81 G Ignition signal No. 2
[Engine is running]
E
F
PBIB0522E
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V G
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V H
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
68 G (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V I
sensor)
● Engine: Stopped J
Less than 4.75V
69 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON] K
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed L
[Engine is running]
70 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V M
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
(Compressor operates)
[Engine is running]
71 R Battery current sensor ● Battery: Fully charged* Approximately 2.6 - 3.5V
● Idle speed
Engine coolant temperature
73 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
engine coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - Approximately 1.0V
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
78 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground [Engine is running]

82 B (Accelerator pedal position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor 1) ● Idle speed

[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
85 W DATA link connector
● CONSULT-II or GST: Disconnected. (11 - 14V)
86 P CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.3V

Sensor power supply
90 L (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
91 G (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 2)
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.8V
● Engine: Stopped 0.3 - 0.45V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
98 GR
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine: Stopped Less than 2.4V
Approximately 4V
● ASCD steering switch: OFF
Approximately 0V
● MAIN switch: Pressed
99 SB ASCD steering switch Approximately 1V
● CANCEL switch: Pressed
Approximately 3V
● RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
Approximately 2V
● SET/COAST switch: Pressed
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Fully released
101 LG Stop lamp switch
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V)

Approximately 0V
G (A/T) ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
102 PNP switch
O (M/T) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Shift lever: Except above (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF]
104 O Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine: Stopped 0.6 - 0.95V EC
106 R
● Engine: Stopped Less than 4.75V C
Fuel tank temperature sen- D
107 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sor
tank temperature.
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T) E
Approximately 0V
● Clutch pedal and/or clutch pedal:
Slightly depressed (M/T)
108 LG ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON] F
● Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Clutch pedal and brake pedal: (11 - 14V)
Fully released (M/T) G
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
109 W/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: ON] H
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition I
111 BR ECM relay (Self shut-off) switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning igni- J
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch K
0 - 1.0V
ON
113 V Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON] L
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ON
115 B [Engine is running] M

ECM ground Body ground
116 GR ● Idle speed
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 G [Ignition switch: ON]
valve (11 - 14V)
119 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 P (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 R/B [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to SC-5, "SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK" .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) UBS00L3L
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
Data monitor (SPEC)
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
monitor
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT

RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE
EC
SUP- FREEZE MONI- DTC
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC*1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
2
DATA* PORT C
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
D
Mass air flow sensor × × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × × ×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × × × E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×
Wheel sensor × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × × F
Throttle position sensor × × × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × ×

G
EVAP control system pressure
× × ×
sensor
Intake air temperature sensor × × × × H
Knock sensor ×
INPUT
Refrigerant pressure sensor × ×

Closed throttle position switch I
(accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
signal)
Air conditioner switch × × J
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × ×
Stop lamp switch × × ×
K
Power steering pressure sensor × × ×
Battery voltage × ×
Load signal × × L
Fuel level sensor × × ×
Battery current sensor × × ×
ASCD steering switch × × ×
M
ASCD brake switch × × ×

ASCD clutch switch × × ×

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC* 1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Fuel injector × × ×
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × ×
Throttle control motor relay × × ×

Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume con-
× × × × ×
trol solenoid valve
Air conditioner relay × ×
OUTPUT
Fuel pump relay × × × ×

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × × × ×*3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × ×*3
EVAP canister vent control valve × × × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × × ×
valve
Alternator × × ×
Calculated load value × × ×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-121, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
*3: Always “CMPLT” is displayed.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Start Procedure" .
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
A
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE When detecting EVAP vapor leak
IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER point of EVAP system
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
● IGN SW ON EC
● ENGINE NOT RUNNING
● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS- C
TEM
● FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS- D
TEM CLOSE”
● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
E
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY F
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
VIN REGISTRATION ● IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM When registering VIN in ECM
G
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing H
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

I
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-54, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION ITEMS" .
J
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
Description
item* K
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
CODE
EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX] L
● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B1 M
Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
ABSOL TH-P/S
● The throttle valve opening at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[%]
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
Monitored item [Unit] SIG- Description Remarks
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
● Indicates the engine speed computed drops below the idle rpm.
from the signals of the crankshaft posi-
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the
tion sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × ×
sensor is displayed. value is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
● When the engine is stopped, a certain
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × back correction factor per cycle is indi-
cated. ● This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
● When the engine coolant temperature
● The engine coolant temperature (deter-
sensor is open or short-circulated, ECM
COOLAN TEMP/S mined by the signal voltage of the engine
× × enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool-
[°C] or [°F] coolant temperature sensor) is dis-
ant temperature determined by the ECM
played.
is displayed.
● The A/F signal computed from the input
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × ×
signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed.
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
HO2S2 (B1) [V] ×
sensor 2 is displayed.
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 sig-
nal:
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) RICH: Means the amount of oxygen after ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
×
[RICH/LEAN] three way catalyst is relatively small. value is indicated.
LEAN: Means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively large.
● The vehicle speed computed from the
VHCL SPEED SE
× × vehicle speed signal sent from combina-
[km/h] or [mph]
tion meter is displayed.
● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
BATTERY VOLT [V] × ×
played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
● The accelerator pedal position sensor
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × signal voltage is displayed.
terminal voltage signal.
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by
● The throttle position sensor signal volt-
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM
THRTL SEN 2 [V] × age is displayed.
terminal voltage signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM
MAIN
INPUT A
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● The fuel temperature (determined by the EC
FUEL T/TMP SE
× signal voltage of the fuel tank tempera-
[°C] or [°F]
ture sensor) is displayed.
● The intake air temperature (determined
INT/A TEMP SE
× × by the signal voltage of the intake air
C
[°C] or [°F]
temperature sensor) is indicated.
● The signal voltage of EVAP control sys-
EVAP SYS PRES [V] × D
tem pressure sensor is displayed.
● The signal voltage of the fuel level sen-
FUEL LEVEL SE [V] ×
sor is displayed.
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] E
START SIGNAL computed by the ECM according to the ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
× ×
[ON/OFF] signals of engine speed and battery volt- played regardless of the starter signal.
age.
F
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com-
CLSD THL POS
× × puted by ECM according to the accelera-
[ON/OFF]
tor pedal position sensor signal.
G
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
AIR COND SIG
× × conditioner switch as determined by the
[ON/OFF]
air conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the H
× ×
[ON/OFF] park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
PW/ST SIGNAL system (determined by the signal voltage I
× ×
[ON/OFF] of the power steering pressure sensor
signal) is indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the J
LOAD SIGNAL electrical load signal.
× ×
[ON/OFF] ON: Lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Lighting switch is OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
K
×
[ON/OFF] tion switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
× L
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse M
● When the engine is stopped, a certain
INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] × width compensated by ECM according to
computed value is indicated.
the input signals.
● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
IGN TIMING [BTDC] ×
ECM according to the input signals. value is indicated.
● “Calculated load value” indicates the
CAL/LD VALUE [%] value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.
● Indicates the mass airflow computed by
MASS AIRFLOW
ECM according to the signal voltage of
[g·m/s]
the mass air flow sensor.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
computed by the ECM according to the
PURG VOL C/V [%] input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA]
advanced angle.
● The control value of the intake valve tim-
ing control solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] indicated.
● The advance angle becomes larger as
the value increases.
● The air conditioner relay control condition
AIR COND RLY
× (determined by ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
input signals) is indicated.
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control con-
FUEL PUMP RLY
× dition determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals.
● The control condition of the EVAP canis-
ter vent control valve (determined by
VENT CONT/V ECM according to the input signals) is
[ON/OFF] indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
× control condition determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
I/P PULLY SPD ● Indicates the engine speed computed
×
[rpm] from the primary speed sensor signal.
VEHICLE SPEED ● Indicates the vehicle speed computed
×
[km/h] or [MPH] from the revolution sensor signal.
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not
[YET/CMPLT] been performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has
already been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
[km] or [mile]
● Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control
value computed by ECM according to the
A/F S1 HTR (B1) [%] input signals.
● The current flow to the heater becomes
larger as the value increases.
● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
AC PRESS SEN [V]
pressure sensor is displayed.
● The vehicle speed computed from the
VHCL SPEED SE
vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is
[km/h] or [MPH]
displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
● The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
MAIN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN
[ON/OFF] switch signal.
CANCEL SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CAN-
[ON/OFF] CEL switch signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM
MAIN
INPUT A
SIG-
NALS
NALS
RESUME/ACC SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from EC
[ON/OFF] RESUME/ACCELERATE switch signal.
SET SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/
[ON/OFF] COAST switch signal.
C
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
BRAKE SW1
brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch
[ON/OFF]
switch signal.
D
BRAKE SW2 ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the E
VHCL SPD CUT ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed increased to exces-
sively high compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
F

NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
LO SPEED CUT ASCD set speed. G
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to exces-
sively low compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
H
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
AT OD MONITOR ● For M/T models always “OFF” is dis-
according to the input signal from the
[ON/OFF] played.
TCM.
I
AT OD CANCEL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D ● For M/T models always “OFF” is dis-
[ON/OFF] cancel signal sent from the TCM. played.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
CRUISE LAMP J
lamp determined by the ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET
SET LAMP
[ON/OFF]
lamp determined by the ECM according K
to the input signals.
● Indicates the duty ratio of the power gen-
eration command value. The ratio is cal- L
ALT DUTY [%]
culated by ECM based on the battery
current sensor signal.
● Indicates the correction factor stored in
ECM. M
The factor is calculated from the differ-
A/F ADJ-B1
ence between the target air-fuel ratio
stored in ECM and the air-fuel ratio cal-
culated form A/F sensor 1 signal.
● The signal voltage of battery current sen-
BAT CUR SEN [mV]
sor is displayed.
● The control condition of the power gener-
ation voltage variable control (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input
ALT DUTY SIG signals) is indicated.
[ON/OFF] ON: Power generation voltage variable
control is active
OFF: Power generation voltage variable
control is inactive.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
Voltage [V]
Frequency ● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to
[msec], [Hz] or [%] be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ● Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
width measured by the probe. They are the same figures as an actual
DUTY-LOW piece of data which was just previously
PLS WIDTH-HI measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

Monitored Item
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signal of the crankshaft position
ENG SPEED [rpm] × ×
sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × back correction factor per cycle is indi-
cated. ● This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injector
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● A/F sensor 1
● Engine: Return to the original

trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Timing light: Set ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
● Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
● Engine: After warming up, idle ● Harness and connectors
the engine.
● Compression
● A/C switch OFF
POWER BAL- ● Fuel injector
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Power transistor
(M/T)
● Spark plug
● Cut off each injector signal one at
a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coil

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
A
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel injector EC
● Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors
● Turn the fuel pump relay ON and C
RELAY ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay
OFF using CONSULT-II and lis-
ten to operating sound.
● Engine: After warming up, run D
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
E
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
FUEL/T TEMP
● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II. F
SEN
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connectors
TROL/V ● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF sound.
G
● Solenoid valve
with the CONSULT-II and listen
to operating sound.
● Engine: Return to the original H
● Harness and connectors
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
I
● Engine: Idle ● Harness and connectors
ALTERNATOR
● Change duty ratio using CON- Battery voltage changes. ● IPDM E/R
DUTY
SULT-II. ● Alternator J
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
K
For details, refer to EC-58, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. L
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page
M
PURG FLOW P0441 P0441 EC-340
P0442 EC-346
EVAPORATIVE SYS- EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
P0455 EC-398
TEM
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-405
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 P0443 EC-354
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-221
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-240
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-268
HO2S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-258
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-250
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to D40 models but appears in DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE screens.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
PBIB1593E
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION
MANUAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” in GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient
Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
PBIB0197E
I
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function UBS00L3M
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has J
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual. K
SEF139P
M
FUNCTION
Diagnostic service Function
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-58, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND
1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Diagnostic service Function
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This
includes:
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
● Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
● Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
● Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve
can be closed.
In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
● Low ambient temperature
Service $08 — ● Low battery voltage
● Engine running
● Ignition switch OFF
● Low fuel temperature
● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. A
2. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the fuse box cover.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
D
BBIA0538E
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in E

the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
F
SEF398S H
5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service pro-

cedure. I
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
J
SEF416S
L
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor UBS00L3N
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. M
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Almost the same speed
ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare the CONSULT-II value with tachometer indication. as the tachometer indica-
tion.
MAS A/F SE-B1 ● See EC-137, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
B/FUEL SCHDL ● See EC-137, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B1 ● See EC-137, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are
met.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6
HO2S2 (B1) – Engine: After warming up
- 1.0V
– Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
1 minute under no load.
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are
met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) – Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
– Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
● Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer indi-
VHCL SPEED SE as the speedometer indi-
cation.
cation.
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
ACCEL SEN 1 ● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
ACCEL SEN 2*1 (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
THRTL SEN 1
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2*1 Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle the
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Lighting switch: 2nd ON
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Lighting switch: OFF OFF
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
● Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan: Operating ON

HEATER FAN SW
engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INJ PULSE-B1
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 4.0 msec
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 10° - 20° BTDC
IGN TIMING
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
● No load

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
A
● Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/s
EC
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V even slightly, after engine starting) C
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● No load 2,000 rpm —
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA D

INT/V TIM (B1)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA
● No load E
INT/V SOL (B1)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 60% F
● No load
● Engine: After warming up, idle the G
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON H
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF I
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up J
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF K
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20km/h (12 MPH) as the tachometer indica-
tion L
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indi-
VEHICLE SPEED as the speedometer indi-
cation.
cation
M
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
A/F S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100%
● Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indi-
VHCL SPEED SE as the speedometer indi-
cation.
cation
The preset vehicle speed
SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
is displayed.
MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW ● Ignition switch: ON
OFF
Released
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
● Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T)
● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: ON
BRAKE SW1 Fully released (M/T)
(ASCD brake switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: OFF
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(STOP lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
at the 2nd time
● MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is between

40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 ASCD: Not operating OFF
MPH)
ALT DUTY ● Engine: Idle 0 - 80%
● Engine: Idle
● Battery: Fully charged*2
BAT CUR SEN ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) Approx. 2,600 - 3,500mV
● No load
● Power generation voltage variable control: Operating ON
ALT DUTY SIG
● Power generation voltage variable control: Not operating OFF
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
*2: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to SC-5, "SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK" .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L3O
A
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with shift lever in D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF.
C
F
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” G
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
H
PBIB2445E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
PBIB2099E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
A
Description UBS00L3P
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR
(SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in EC
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When
the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may
have one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) E
Testing Condition UBS00L3Q
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles) F

2
● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
G
● Engine speed: Idle
● Transmission: Warmed-up H
– A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF
TEMP SE 1” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
– M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes. I
● Electrical load: Not applied
– Air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight ahead.
J
Inspection Procedure UBS00L3R
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale dis-
K
play.
1. Perform EC-76, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. L
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-
B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. M
5. If NG, go to EC-138, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF601Z

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L3S
OVERALL SEQUENCE
PBIB2318E

[QR]
EC
PBIB3213E

[QR]
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-137, "Testing Condition" .
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode,
and make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because
they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is out of the SP value
even a little.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
PBIB2369E
2. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2332E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
PBIB2332E

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[QR]
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL A
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE: EC
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con- C
dition.
>> INSPECTION END D
6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-85, "Fuel Pressure Check" .) E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-85, "Fuel Pressure Check" . F
GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
G
H
– Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
– Clogged fuel filter
– Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-587, "FUEL INJECTOR" .) I
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-85, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
J
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” K

1. Start engine.
the SP value. L
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9. M
9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST

1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E

[QR]
– Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-587, "FUEL INJECTOR" .)
– Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-592, "FUEL PUMP" .)
– Intake air leakage
– Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-60, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
● For DTC P0130, refer to EC-222, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
● For DTC P2A00, refer to EC-561, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT

Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect
it.
>> GO TO 16.

[QR]
16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” A
1. Start engine.
the SP value. EC
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-98, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . C

D
OK or NG
E
F
G
PBIB2332E

H
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
– Engine oil level is too high
– Engine oil viscosity I
– Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
– Noise from engine
– Noise from transmission, etc. J
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
– Valve clearance malfunction
K
– Intake valve timing control function malfunction
– Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
L
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM M

Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.

[QR]
20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-190, "DTC
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.
23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”

Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 29.
PBIB2370E
24. REPLACE ECM

1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
>> GO TO 29.

[QR]
25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.
D
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the E
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END F
27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 30. I
J
PBIB2370E
28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM K
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
● Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct L
● Looseness of oil filler cap
● Disconnection of oil level gauge
● Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve M
● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
● Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
● Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system
parts
● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.
29. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-98, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .

[QR]
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
A
Description UBS00L3T
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of Intermittent
Incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. C
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations

STEP in Work Flow Situation D
2 The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
3 or 4 The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
E
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L3U F
1. INSPECTION START G
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-66, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .
H
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS I
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.

Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. K
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION L
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. M
NG >> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS

Refer to GI-24, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged
Contact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace connector.

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[QR]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:24110
Wiring Diagram UBS00L3V
BBWA1889E

[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V C
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] D
0 - 1.0V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay OFF
111 BR E
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
F
119 R Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
120 P ECM (11 - 14V)

[QR]
BBWA1792E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Idle speed
115 B [Engine is running]

116 GR ● Idle speed D
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L3W
1. INSPECTION START E
Start engine.
Is engine running?
F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
G
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. H
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. J
NG >> GO TO 3.
K
MBIB0015E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L

● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
M
● 10A fuse
● Harness connectors M31, E152
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

[QR]
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness connectors F32, E2
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E119 terminal 3
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-598, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB2658E

[QR]
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground EC
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
C
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO E
11. PBIB1630E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

F
CONSULT-II or tester. G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
I
PBIB1191E
J
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
K
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 4.
L
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

[QR]
12. CHECK 20A FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.

Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer toEC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.

16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-147, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.
Ground Inspection UBS00L3X
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.

[QR]
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even A
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
● Remove the ground bolt or screw. EC
● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
● Clean as required to assure good contact.
● Reinstall bolt or screw securely. C
● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one D
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-33, "Ground Distribution" .
E
PBIB1870E

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[QR]
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
Description UBS00L3Y
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L3Z
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
● When ECM is not transmitting or receiving
U1000*1
CAN communication signal of OBD (emission
1000*1 related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
● When ECM is not transmitting or receiving (CAN communication line is open or
line
U1001*2 CAN communication signal other than OBD shorted)
1001*2 (emission related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or
more.
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic (A/T models).
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis (M/T models).
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L40

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L41
EC
BBWA2409E

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L42
Go to LAN-48, "CAN System Specification Chart" .

DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION
[QR]
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
A
Description UBS00P05
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many EC
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00P06
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic (A/T models). D
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis (M/T models).
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
E
U1010 When detecting error during the initial diagno-
CAN communication bus ● ECM
1010 sis for CAN controller of each control unit.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00P07 F

WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. G
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-160, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
J
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
K

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00P08
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
5. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again?
With GST
2. Select “Service $04” with GST.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796
A
Description UBS00L43
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve C
*: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
D
PBIB3279E
J
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid K
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
L
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L44
Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION M
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA
● No load
INT/V SOL (B1)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 60%
● No load

[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L45
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● Intake valve control solenoid valve
P0011 Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
0011 control performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
● Timing chain installation
● Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for
intake valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P0075, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0075. Refer to
EC-176, "DTC P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" .
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive sec-
onds.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
ENG SPEED 500 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
PBIB0164E
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 4.3 msec
Shift lever P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
4. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
5. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-163, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,800 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Shift lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
[QR]
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. A
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP EC
1. Start engine.
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi- C
nated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> Go to LU-6, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" .
PBIA8559J
F
2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-164, "Component Inspection" . G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. H
3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. J
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
4. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. L
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
5. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) M

● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
PBIB0565E

[QR]
Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" .
No >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT

Refer to EM-44, "Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.

For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-323 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-330 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00L48
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0193E
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed. PBIB2275E
Removal and Installation UBS00L49

Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" .

DTC P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[QR]
DTC P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER PFP:22693
A
Description UBS00LAN
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1 heater control heater
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air C
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LAO

E
A/F S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100%
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LAP F
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) ● Harness or connectors G
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0031 sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
1 heater control circuit open or shorted.)
0031 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
low
through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
H
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) ● Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0032
1 heater control circuit (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to shorted.)
0032
high ECM through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 I
heater.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LAQ

J
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: K
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II L

with CONSULT-II.
M
2. Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-167, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure ″WITH CONSULT-II″ above.

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LAR
BBWA2837E

[QR]
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running] F
A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LAS

H
I
BBIA0614E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0617E
3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E

● Harness connectors E2, F32
● IPDM E/R harness connector E119
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 7.

[QR]
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A
Perform EC-147, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. EC
7. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 C

Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
D
● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxy-
gen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. E
>> INSPECTION END

F
Component Inspection UBS00LAT
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. G
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
H
1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1. I
CAUTION:
● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such J
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool K
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB1684E
Removal and Installation UBS00LAU
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR HEATER

Refer to EM-21, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[QR]
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
Description UBS00L4A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
● Engine: After warming up
ON
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L4B

● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no load
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L4C
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors

P0037 Heated oxygen sensor 2 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
0037 heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors

P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
0038 heater control circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.)
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L4D
A
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: EC
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II C
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera- D
ture.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and E
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-173, "Diagnostic Procedure" F
. SEF174Y
WITH GST G
Follow the procedure ″WITH CONSULT-II″ above.

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L4E
BBWA2835E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the fol-
lowing conditions are met D
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
Heated oxygen sensor 2 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
25 P
heater
E
under no load
SEC981D

● Engine: Stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE F
[Engine is running] G
quickly after the following conditions are met.
74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V H
4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load. I
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L4F K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
BBIA0613E
3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0112E

● IPDM E/R connector E119
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 25 and HO2S2 terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

[QR]
>> INSPECTION END EC
Component Inspection UBS00L4G
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER C

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 9.9 - 13.3 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
D
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
E
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped F
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system G
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
H
SEF249Y
J
Removal and Installation UBS00L4H
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EX-4, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . K

DTC P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
DTC P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796
Component Description UBS00LB0
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LB1

INT/V SOL (B1)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 60%
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LB2
● Harness or connectors
Intake valve timing con- An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid
P0075
trol solenoid valve cir- through intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
0075
cuit valve.
● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LB3
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LB4
EC
BBWA1810E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 10V
Intake valve timing
11 LG
control solenoid valve [Engine is running]
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V)

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LB5
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness EC
connector.
C
BBIA0622E
E
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
PBIB0192E
I
2. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
Check the following. J
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
K
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR L
OPEN AND SHORT
M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve termi-
nal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

[QR]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LB6

valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground


CAUTION:
NOTE:
Removal and Installation UBS00LB7


DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
A
Component Description UBS00L4I
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire EC
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss. C
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. D
PBIA9559J
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L4J

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
G
CAL/LD VALUE
● No load
H
MASS AIRFLOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/s I
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L4K
J
(The sensor circuit is open or K
shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Mass air flow sensor
A)
under light load driving condition.
● EVAP control system pressure L
sensor
Mass air flow sensor cir- ● Intake air temperature sensor

P0101
cuit range/performance ● Harness or connectors
0101 M
problem (The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Intake air leaks
B)
under heavy load driving condition. ● Mass air flow sensor
● EVAP control system pressure
sensor
● Intake air temperature sensor

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L4L
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.

If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stop soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
With CONSULT-II
4. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
.
SEF174Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-185, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
4. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-185, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
SEF243Y

[QR]
onds. A
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm

THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V EC
THRTL SEN 2 More than 3V
Shift lever Suitable position
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
C
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-185, "Diagnostic Procedure" PBIB0199E
. D
Overall Function Check UBS00L4M
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B E

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST F
2. Select Service $01 with GST.
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01. G
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
5. If NG, go to EC-185, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H
SEF534P

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L4N
BBWA1922E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
F
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay OFF G
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch OFF H
120 P ECM (11 - 14V)
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L4O
1. INSPECTION START
J
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A >> GO TO 3. K
B >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

L
Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses M
● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.

[QR]
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
BBIA0622E
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E

● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.

[QR]
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
H
8. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
J
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. L
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to EC-188, "Component Inspection" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00L4P
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the follow-
ing conditions.
Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
0.9 - 1.2
operating temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
1.5 - 1.9
normal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*
SEF178Y
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.

7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again.
9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-II
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.9
PBIB1106E
4,000 rpm.

[QR]
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 and 3 again.
If OK, go to next step. A
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. EC
Removal and Installation UBS00L4Q
C
Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
D

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description UBS00L4R
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
the heat loss.
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L4S

CAL/LD VALUE
● No load
MASS AIRFLOW
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L4T
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

Trouble diagnosis
name
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 circuit low input sent to ECM. ● Intake air leaks
● Mass air flow sensor
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L4U
A
NOTE:
EC
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-193, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D
F
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G

With CONSULT-II H
3. Wait at least 5 seconds. I
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. J
SEF058Y
L
With GST
M

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L4V
BBWA1922E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
● Idle speed
F
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay OFF G
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch OFF H
120 P (11 - 14V)
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L4W
1. INSPECTION START
J
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2. K
P0103 >> GO TO 3.

L
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[QR]
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

BBIA0622E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E


[QR]
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
J
Refer to EC-147, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K
>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection UBS00L4X

With CONSULT-II
M
ing conditions.
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.9
SEF178Y
4,000 rpm.

[QR]

Without CONSULT-II
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx 0.4
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.9
PBIB1106E
4,000 rpm.
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 and 3 again.
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.
Removal and Installation UBS00L4Y


DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description UBS00L4Z
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal EC
to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C
PBIA9559J
E
<Reference data>
Intake air
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ F
temperature °C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359 G
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. I
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
P0112 Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0112 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0113 Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Intake air temperature sensor K
0113 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.

L
NOTE:
M
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
BBWA1923E

[QR]
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS A

2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . EC
E
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor

is built-into) harness connector.
H
BBIA0622E
K
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and
ground.
Voltage: Approximately 5V L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors. M
PBIB1169E
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
[QR]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5
and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIA9559J
SEF012P


DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description UBS00L56
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the EC
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases. C
SEF594K
E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 G
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine H
coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P
CAUTION:
I
J
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
K
P0117 Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sen-
0117 sensor circuit low input sor is sent to ECM.
P0118 Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sen-
● Engine coolant temperature sensor L
0118 sensor circuit high input sor is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. M

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

[QR]
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
EC
BBWA1740E

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L5A

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
BBIA0615E
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB0080E

[QR]
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G

H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00L5B
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
J
L
PBIB2005E
M
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation UBS00L5C
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to CO-27, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description UBS00L5D
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition,
these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the
ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve
opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L5E

THRTL SEN 1 Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2*
● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. thus it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L5F

P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP ● Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
● Electric throttle control actuator
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP (TP sensor 2)
0123 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L5G
A
NOTE:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L5H
BBWA1794E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply C
● Engine: Stopped D
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON] E
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed G
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V H
[Ignition switch: ON] I
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed J
Sensor power supply
91 G (Accelerator pedal posi- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
tion sensor 2)
K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L5I
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L

M
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
BBIA0616E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2604E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram
47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 EC-208
91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-542
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-546, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[QR]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
3. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . EC
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
M
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00L5J
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

4. Set shift lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
50 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
69 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next PBIB1060E
step.
Removal and Installation UBS00L5K

Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description UBS00L5L
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or EC
P0118. Refer to EC-201, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" .
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant C
mistor decreases as temperature increases. D
SEF594K
F
< Reference data>
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F) G
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
H
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine I
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- J
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L5M
K
● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not ● Harness or connectors
Insufficient engine cool- practical, even when some time has passed L
P0125 (High resistance in the circuit)
ant temperature for after starting the engine.
0125 ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
closed loop fuel control ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control. ● Thermostat
M
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L5N
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II

[QR]
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L5O

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION

When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-21, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING"
.

Refer to EC-203, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00L5P
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

EC
D
PBIB2005E
<Reference data> E

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 F
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
G
H
SEF012P
Removal and Installation UBS00L5Q

Refer to CO-21, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>
Intake air
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
CAUTION:
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L5S
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors

P0127 Intake air temperature (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
0127 too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor. ● Intake air temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L5T
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.

[QR]
b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c. Check the engine coolant temperature. A
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant tempera- EC
ture is above 90°C (194°F).
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 con- SEF189Y
secutive seconds. D
WITH GST E
Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L5U
F
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" . G
J
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 3.

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00L5V
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIA9559J
SEF012P
Removal and Installation UBS00L5W


DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION PFP:21200
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L5X
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough. EC
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
C
● Thermostat
The engine coolant temperature does not
P0128 ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermo-
Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though
0128 stat
the engine has run long enough.
● Engine coolant temperature sensor D
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L5Y
NOTE: E
TESTING CONDITION: F
● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 69°C (156°F).
WITH CONSULT-II G
1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-21, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may
come on. H
3. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. I
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 69°C (156°F).
If it is above 69°C (156°F), cool down the engine to less than J
69°C (156°F), then retry from step 1.
5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following
conditions. K
VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)

SEF176Y
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-219, "Diagnostic Procedure" L
.
WITH GST
M
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L5Z

OK or NG

[QR]

PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P

Refer to CO-27, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .

DTC P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC P0130 A/F SENSOR 1 PFP:22693
A
Component Description UBS00LDT
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sen-
sor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst con- EC
centration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which
transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
C
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the D
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-
pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to F
indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LDU

I
J
Maintaining engine speed at
A/F SEN1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LDV

K
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC L
Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
No.
The A/F signal computed by ECM from
A) the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly in the ● Harness or connectors M
P0130 range other than approx. 1.5V. (A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit shorted.)
0130 The A/F signal computed by ECM from
B) the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
approx. 1.5V.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LDW

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
With CONSULT-II
3. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
.
SEF174Y
With GST
CAUTION:
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-225, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen.
ENG SPEED 1,750 - 3,200 rpm
Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec
D position with OD “OFF” (A/T)
Shift lever
4th position (M/T)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from

step 2. SEF576Z

[QR]
7. Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE: A
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
EC
SEF577Z
D
8. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from
step 6. E
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-225, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F
G
SEF578Z
Overall Function Check UBS00LDX

H
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B I
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set D position with OD “OFF” (A/T) or 4th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the
vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). K
NOTE:
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for 5 times. L
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for 5 times. M
8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
9. Make sure that no 1st trip DTC is displayed.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-225, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LDY
BBWA2838E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LDZ

H
I
BBIA0614E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0617E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

[QR]
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal

1 16 C
2 75
5 35
D
6 56

E
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist. F
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 6.
J
6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
CAUTION: K
● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxy- L
gen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END M
Removal and Installation UBS00LE0
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR 1


[QR]
Component Description UBS00LD1
sor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst con-
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the

gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LD2

2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LD3
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
P0131 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the (A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
0131 circuit low voltage A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V.
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LD4
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II

[QR]
If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-231, "Diag- A
nostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then EC
restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
C
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive sec-
onds.
SEF581Z
ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm D

VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
E
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. F
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-231, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LD5
BBWA2838E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LD6

H
I
BBIA0614E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
BBIA0617E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

[QR]

1 16 C
2 75
5 35
D
6 56

E
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 6.
J
CAUTION: K
>> INSPECTION END M
Removal and Installation UBS00LD7


[QR]
Component Description UBS00LD8
< air).

ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LD9

2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LDA
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.
P0132 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
0132 1 circuit high voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LDB
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II

[QR]
If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-237, "Diag- A
nostic Procedure" .
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then EC
restart engine.
C
onds.
SEF581Z
ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm D

E
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. F
4.
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-237, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LDC
BBWA2838E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LDD

H
I
BBIA0614E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
BBIA0617E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

[QR]

1 16 C
2 75
5 35
D
6 56

E
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 6.
J
CAUTION: K
>> INSPECTION END M
Removal and Installation UBS00LDE


[QR]
Component Description UBS00LE1
< air).

ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LE2

2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LE3
To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F sig-
nal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operat-
ing (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F sensor 1 signal cycling time index) is inordi-
nately long or not.
(A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
● The response of the A/F signal computed by ● Fuel pressure
P0133 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more
0133 1 circuit slow response ● Fuel Injector
than the specified time.
● Intake air leaks
● Exhaust gas leaks
● PCV

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LE4
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
C
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Touch “START”. E
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go F
to the following step.
PBIB0756E
H
7. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be dis-

played on the CONSULT-II screen. I
a. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about J
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-
137, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
K
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E
L
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to
EC-137, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . M
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-244, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB0758E
WITH GST
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.

[QR]
● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Lack of fuel
● Fuel injector
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
● PCV valve

5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LE5
EC
BBWA2838E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LE6

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
BBIA0617E

[QR]
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK A
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
EC
PBIB1216E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace. F
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

G
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. H

[QR]
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-66, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? BBIA0622E

Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-276, "DTC P0171 FUEL INJEC-
TION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-284, "DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 6.

[QR]
6. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
BBIA0617E
E
Voltage: Battery voltage F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
NG >> GO TO 7.
H
PBIB1683E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse K

L

[QR]
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
1 16
2 75
5 35
6 56

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK PCV VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

[QR]
13. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 A
CAUTION:
● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m EC
gen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. C
>> INSPECTION END

D
Removal and Installation UBS00LE7

E

DTC P0137 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC P0137 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description UBS00LC5
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LC6

HO2S2 (B1) ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
conditions are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) LEAN ←→ RICH
– Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no load.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LC7
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is suf-
ficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB1921E
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0137 Heated oxygen sensor The maximum voltage from the sensor is not ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
0137 2 circuit low voltage reached to the specified voltage. ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector

DTC P0137 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LC8
A
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
C
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C F
(158°F). SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
G
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II. H
K
PBIB2373E
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. L
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-254, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
M
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check UBS00LC9
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.

DTC P0137 HO2S2
[QR]
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.73V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with OD “OFF”(A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be above 0.73V at least once during this PBIB1197E
procedure.

DTC P0137 HO2S2
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LCA
EC
BBWA2836E

DTC P0137 HO2S2
[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

lowing conditions are met
25 P
heater under no load
SEC981D

[Engine is running]
74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LCB

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0137 HO2S2
[QR]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
C
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
D
E
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. F
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
G
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
nector.
H
6. Erase the DTC memory.
Refer to EC-66, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . I
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. BBIA0622E
J
Yes or No
K
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-276, "DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYS-
TEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 3.
L
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. BBIA0613E

DTC P0137 HO2S2
[QR]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LCC

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
SEF174Y
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1783E

DTC P0137 HO2S2
[QR]
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A
EC
PBIB1920E D
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.73V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: E
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor F
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. G
load. H
I
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.73V at least once during this J
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.73V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary. K
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
position with OD “OFF”(A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). L
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E
procedure.
M
CAUTION:
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Removal and Installation UBS00LCD

Refer to EX-4, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]

tions.
SEF327R

HO2S2 (B1) ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
conditions are met.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00P09
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching
time.
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving con-
dition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB1848E
MALFUNCTION B
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2376E

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause A
An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
A)
is sent to ECM.
● Heated oxygen sensor 2 EC
P0138 Heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors
0138 2 circuit high voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
B) C
reached to the specified voltage.
● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00P0A

D

If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
E
NOTE:
F
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode G
with CONSULT-II.
ture. H
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. I
. SEF174Y J
With GST
K
With CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION: L
For better results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
with CONSULT-II. M
ture.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F). SEF174Y

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
PBIB2372E
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
Overall Function Check UBS00P0B
With GST
load.
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
essary.
position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
procedure.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
EC
BBWA2836E

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

25 P
SEC981D

[Engine is running]
74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00P0C

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM EC
terminal 78.
C
OK or NG D
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to ground
or short to power in harness or connectors. E
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. F
G
Continuity should not exist. H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER J
Check connectors for water.

Water should not exist. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
L
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? BBIA0622E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-284, "DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYS-
TEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM
terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. C

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. D
OK or NG
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power E
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F

G
Refer to Wiring Diagram. H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. L

Refer to EC-147, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

PBIB1783E
PBIB1920E
CAUTION:
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Without CONSULT-II
load.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
at least 10 times. A
procedure.
EC
sary.
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D C
position with OD “OFF” (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
procedure. D
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. F

Refer to EX-4, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . G

DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
Component Description UBS00L6A

tions.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L6B

HO2S2 (B1) ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the floowing 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
conditions are met.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L6C

between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition
such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0139 Heated oxygen sensor It takes more time for the sensor to respond ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
0139 2 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector

DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L6D
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
C
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C F
(158°F). SEF174Y
G
8. Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
H
PBIB2374E
K
NOTE:
If will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. L
M
Overall Function Check UBS00L6E
WITH GST
load.

DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
at least 10 times.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
essary.
position with OD “OFF” (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec- PBIB1197E

DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L6F
EC
BBWA2836E

DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

25 P
SEC981D

[Engine is running]
74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are met. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L6G

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
With CONSULT-II
EC
with CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. F
G
nector.
H
I
J
Yes or No
K
No >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
BBIA0613E

DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00L6H

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

PBIB1783E

DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
A
EC
PBIB1920E D
CAUTION: E
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. G
load. H
I
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.73V at least once during this J
procedure.
sary. K
position with OD “OFF” (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). L
procedure.
M
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation UBS00L6I

Refer to EX-4, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .

DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L6J
With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calcu-
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
ECM
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
function
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injec-
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) tion control
Trouble diagnosis
name
● Fuel injector
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
P0171 Fuel injection system ● Exhaust gas leaks
0171 too lean ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
● Lack of fuel
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L6K
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-280, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, perform-
ing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to SEF215Z
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table
below.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)

[QR]
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
Engine coolant temperature T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). A
(T) condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. EC
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-280, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
C
WITH GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. D
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- E
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected. F
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be G
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- BBIA0622E
280, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NOTE: H
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min- I
utes. Refer to the table below.
J
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm K
L
Engine coolant temperature T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
M
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L6L
BBWA2839E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Warm-up condition H
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on I
rpm at idle.
22 LG Fuel injector No. 3
23 SB Fuel injector No. 1 PBIB0529E
41 R Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE J

(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
K
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
L
PBIB0530E
M

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L6M
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sen-
sor 1 terminals as follows.
A/F sensor 1 ECM terminal
1 16
2 75
5 35
BBIA0617E
6 56

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1,
2, 5, 6 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[QR]
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE A
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-86, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. C
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D

● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-592, "FUEL PUMP" .) E
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-86, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
● Fuel lines
● Fuel filter for clogging F
>> Repair or replace.

G
With CONSULT-II H
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
I
At idling: 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec
At 2,500 rpm: 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
With GST J
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
K
At idling: 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec
At 2,500 rpm: 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-190, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . M

[QR]
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-587, "FUEL INJECTOR" .
8. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors.
4. Remove fuel injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel injector gallery.
The fuel injector harness connectors should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays
out from fuel injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
PBIB1726E

[QR]

[QR]
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L6N
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calcu-
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Fuel injector
P0172 Fuel injection system too
● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks
0172 rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Incorrect fuel pressure
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L6O
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SULT-II.
The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to SEF215Z
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table
below.
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.

[QR]
If engine starts, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and
check for fouling, etc. A
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. C
nector.
5. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is D
detected.
7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. E
8. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- BBIA0622E
288, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F
NOTE:
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. H
ditions should be satisfied at the same time. I
J
K
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. L
If engine starts, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
M

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L6P
BBWA2839E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 5V
● Idle speed
E
PBIB1584E
● Idle speed
G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on I
rpm at idle.
41 R Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE J

(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
K
L
PBIB0530E
M

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L6Q

PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sen-
sor 1 terminals as follows.
A/F sensor 1 ECM terminal
1 16
2 75
5 35
BBIA0617E
6 56

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1,
2, 5, 6 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[QR]
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE A
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. C
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-592, "FUEL PUMP" .) E
>> Repair or replace. F

G
With CONSULT-II
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H
At idling : 1.0- 4.0 g·m/sec
At 2,500 rpm : 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
I
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST. J
At idling : 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec

At 2,500 rpm : 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or L
grounds. Refer to EC-181, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .

[QR]
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-587, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from EC
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases. C
BBIA0545E
E
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
F
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 G
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L6S
Fuel tank temperature
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage sig- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sensor circuit range/
0181 nals from engine coolant temperature sensor K
performance ● Fuel tank temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L6T
L
NOTE:
M
WITH CONSULT-II
If the result is NG, go to EC-294, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result
will be OK.
If the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the fol-
lowing step.
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F). SEF174Y


[QR]
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L6U
EC
BBWA2410E

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LIN

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION

Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
BBIA0545E
4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E

[QR]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
● Harness connectors E41, C1
● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” EC
>> Repair harness or connector.

C
5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 2 and combination
meter terminal 9. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. G
Check the following. H
● Harness connectors E152, M31
● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
J
7. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. L

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00L6W

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 2 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB2663E
Removal and Installation UBS00L6X

Refer to FL-6, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description UBS00L6Y
BBIA0545E
E
<Reference data>
F
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 G
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L6Z
P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is K
● Fuel tank temperature sensor

L
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. M
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[QR]
BBWA2410E

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LIO

E
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con- J
nector.
K
BBIA0545E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E

[QR]
● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
meter terminal 9. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

terminals 2 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as EC
C
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
D
PBIB2663E
E

Refer to FL-6, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . F

[QR]

The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.

(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2*
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

P0222 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively low voltage from the TP ● Harness or connectors
0222 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP (TP sensor 1)
0223 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[QR]
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[QR]
BBWA1798E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
More than 0.36V
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed G
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V H
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
91 G (Accelerator pedal posi- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
tion sensor 2)
K
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L

M
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
BBIA0616E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2604E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[QR]
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
M
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00L7B

tions.


step.
Removal and Installation UBS00L7C


DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
[QR]
FIRE PFP:00000 A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L7D
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank- EC
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire C
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) D
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revo-
lutions for a change. E
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only G
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
H
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire ● Improper spark plug
Multiple cylinder misfire. I
0300 detected ● Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire ● Incorrect fuel pressure
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 detected ● The fuel injector circuit is open or
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire shorted J
0302 detected ● Fuel injector
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire ● Intake air leak
0303 detected ● The ignition signal circuit is open or K
shorted
● Lack of fuel
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire L
No. 4 cylinder misfires. ● Drive plate or flywheel
0304 detected
M

FIRE
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L7E
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
.
NOTE:
ing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E

Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the feaze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time
Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
WITH GST

FIRE
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L7F
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE A
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.

2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. EC
OK or NG
C
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING D
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace it.
3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST F
With CONSULT-II
G
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
H
J
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II K
When disconnecting each fuel injector harness connector one at a
time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop? L
BBIA0604E
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 9.

FIRE
[QR]
Does each fuel injector make an operating sound at idle?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Check fuel injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-587,
"FUEL INJECTOR" .
PBIB1986E
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustibles.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres-
sure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
pressure.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri-
cal discharge from the ignition coils. BBIA0534E
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be

checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.

FIRE
[QR]
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II A
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and EC
the grounded metal portion.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-598, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . D
7. CHECK SPARK PLUG

Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "Changing Spark Plugs" F
.
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 8. G
H
SEF156I
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

I
1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
2. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion. J
OK or NG
K
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "Changing
Spark Plugs" .
L
9. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. M
Refer to EM-60, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

At idle: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

FIRE
[QR]
● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-592, "FUEL PUMP" .)
● Fuel lines
12. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to EC-76, "Basic Inspection" .
Items Specifications
Target idle speed
Ignition timing
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Follow the EC-76, "Basic Inspection" .
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
1 16
2 75
5 35
6 56 BBIA0617E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1.

FIRE
[QR]
15. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A
With CONSULT-II
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC
At 2,500 rpm : 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
With GST C
Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST.
D
At 2,500 rpm : 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. E
grounds.Refer to EC-181, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
16. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART F
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-98, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 17.
H
17. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
I
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-66, "HOW TO ERASE
J
>> GO TO 18.

K
>> INSPECTION END L

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
Component Description UBS00L7G
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
BBIA0618E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L7H
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0327 input sent to ECM.
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
● Knock sensor
0328 input sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L7I
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L7J
EC
BBWA2411E

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L7K
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0618E
3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-154, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
BBIA0614E E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F
5. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

G
2. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 7. I

J
● Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ground K
>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.

L
M
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00L7L
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF227W

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
Removal and Installation UBS00L7M
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-75, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
A
Component Description UBS00L7N
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at EC
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev-
olution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change. D
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
PBIB0562E
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
E
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
PBIB2382E
I
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L7O

J
● Run engine and compare the CONSULT-II value with tachometer Almost the same speed as the tachometer
ENG SPEED
indication. indication.
K
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L7P
L
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
● Harness or connectors M
● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0335 Crankshaft position
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
0335 sensor (POS) circuit ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
while the engine is running.
● Signal plate
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L7Q
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
4. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-324, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF058Y
.
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L7R
EC
BBWA2413E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
PBIB0527E
Crankshaft position
13 G
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0528E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch OFF
120 P ECM (11 - 14V)

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
D
BBIA0619E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and E

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIB0664E
H

I
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM J
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
4. CHECK CKP (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

L
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground.

[QR]
6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00L7T
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor. EC
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. F
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 (+) - 2 (-) G
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
H
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
PBIB0564E
I
Removal and Installation UBS00L7U
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) J


DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
Component Description UBS00L7V
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction with

camshaft (intake) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
PBIB0562E
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
PBIB2382E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00M1K

● Run engine and compare the CONSULT-II value with tachometer Almost the same speed as the tachometer
ENG SPEED
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L7W
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
for the first few seconds during engine ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
cranking.
P0340 Camshaft position sen- ● Camshaft (Intake)
● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM
0340 sor (PHASE) circuit ● Starter motor (Refer to EM-36 .)
during engine running.
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to EM-36
pattern during engine running. .)
● Dead (Weak) battery

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L7X
A
NOTE:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II C
D
onds at idle speed.
. E
seconds. F
. SEF058Y
G
WITH GST
H

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L7Y
BBWA1801E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle. E
PBIB0525E
Camshaft position
14 Y
sensor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm. G
PBIB0526E
H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF I
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch OFF J
120 P ECM (11 - 14V)
K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L7Z
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM L
Turn ignition switch to START position.

Does the engine turn over? M
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

[QR]
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
BBIA0615E
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0664E

● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R

[QR]
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground.
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
D
E
● Harness connector E2, F32
● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground.
F
7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. H

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
L
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0565E

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
PBIB0563E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E

Refer to EM-36, "CAMSHAFT" .

DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905
A
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. EC
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase. C
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. D
PBIB2377E
● Three way catalyst (manifold) F
● Exhaust tube
● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate ● Intake air leaks
P0420 Catalyst system efficiency properly.
0420 below threshold
● Fuel injector G
● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity. ● Fuel injector leaks
● Spark plug
● Improper ignition timing H
NOTE: I
WITH CONSULT-II J
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode K
with CONSULT-II.
L
M
(158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN SEF189Y
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,500 to 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes, then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
PBIB1784E

[QR]
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest step 1.
PBIB1785E

13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-336, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
SEF535Z
Overall Function Check UBS00L84
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a 1st
WITH GST
load.
6. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal)
and ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 sec-
onds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-336, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V
PBIB2650E
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
EC
PBIB1216E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. F
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING I

J
Target idle speed
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) K
Ignition timing
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. L
5. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR M

1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram for fuel injectors, EC-588, "Wiring Dia-
gram" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-589, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
MBIB0030E

[QR]
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
NOTE:
3. Start engine.
pressure.

checked.
portion.
CAUTION:
●Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II

the grounded metal portion.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-598, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .

[QR]
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG A
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For EC
spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "Changing Spark Plugs"
.
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. C
2. GO TO 9.
D
SEF156I
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III E

F
the grounded portion.
OK or NG G
Spark Plugs" . H

I
J
3. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Turn ignition switch ON. K
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip)>>GO TO 11. L
NG (Drips)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M

Trouble is fixed>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950
System Description UBS00L86
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123 P2127, P2128, P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve stuck closed
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
● Loose, disconnected or improper con-
nection of rubber tube
EVAP control system does not operate properly,
P0441 EVAP control system ● Blocked rubber tube
EVAP control system has a leak between intake
0441 incorrect purge flow
manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. ● Cracked EVAP canister
solenoid valve circuit
● Blocked purge port
● EVAP canister vent control valve

[QR]
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. C
WITH CONSULT-II
D
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- E
SULT-II.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. F
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
Shift lever Suitable position G
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,800 rpm
H
I
L
PBIB0826E
If TESTING is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.

7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
M
Overall Function Check UBS00L89
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.

[QR]
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle
speed and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch ON
Headlamp switch ON
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm
PBIB1109E
Shift lever Any position other than P, N or R
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second.

2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW

With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install
vacuum gauge.
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
BBIA0620E
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG

VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V VACUUM
100% Should exist
0% Should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1786E

[QR]
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install
vacuum gauge. C
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after D
starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist. E
6. Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after
starting engine. BBIA0620E
Vacuum should exist. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

H
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it. J
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT

1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A K
and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
L
SEF367U
3. Check that air flows freely.

OK or NG
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
SEF368U

[QR]
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1786E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION

Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-386, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" , P0453 EC-
392, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

[QR]
12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE A
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace it.
C
13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
D
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F
>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L8B
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB1026E
● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
● Incorrect fuel filler cap used
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EVAP control system ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
P0442 EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP
small leak detected
0442 control system does not operate properly. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
(negative pressure)
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
● EVAP canister is saturated with water
● Fuel level sensor and the circuit
● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
● ORVR system leaks

[QR]
CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A
the MIL may come on.
● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L8C
NOTE: C
TESTING CONDITION:
D
● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
E
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met. G
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE H
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
I
SEF475Y
PBIB0829E M
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-76, "Basic Inspection" .
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to the EVAP can-
ister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
SEC763C

[QR]
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-63, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-63, "Driving Pattern" .
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
– If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-348, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L8D
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION

Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE

Refer to EC-40, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

[QR]
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and
pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
For the location of EVAP service port. EC
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking. C
D
BBIA0620E
SEF916U
H
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. I
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK

J
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode K
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. L
CAUTION:
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres- M

sure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

[QR]
Without CONSULT-II
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The
valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.)
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and
EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-

sure in the system.
BBIA0591E
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Check the following,
● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-41, "Removal and Installation" .
● EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.

attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
BBIA0558E

[QR]
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER A
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.0 kg (4.4 lb). EC
OK or NG
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. C
NG >> GO TO 11.

● EVAP canister for damage
● EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection E
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

F
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II G
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
H
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to I
2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
K
PBIB1786E
L
Without CONSULT-II M
2. Stop engine.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.

[QR]
14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-108, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-37, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

>> GO TO 20.
20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE

Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper
connection. For location, refer to EC-44, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE

Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.

[QR]
22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23. EC
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR C

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 24.
24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
PFP:14920
Description UBS00LEF
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

EVAP canister purge EVAP canister purge volume
flow control control solenoid valve
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM though CAN communication line.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIB2057E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LEG


(Accelerator pedal is not
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) 0%
PURG VOL C/V depressed even slightly, after
● Air conditioner switch: OFF engine starting)

[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LEH
A
● EVAP canister purge volume control EC
solenoid valve
The canister purge flow is detected during the (The valve is stuck open.)
EVAP canister purge
P0443 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
volume control solenoid ● EVAP canister vent control valve C
0443 canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
valve ● EVAP canister
completely closed.
● Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
D
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LEI
NOTE: E
TESTING CONDITION: F
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. G
H
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
I
L
PBIB0839E
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.) M
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LEJ
BBWA2412E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
E
EVAP canister purge vol-

45 R PBIB0050E
ume control solenoid valve
Approximately 1V F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than G
100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB2652E H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay switch OFF
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V) K

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LIR
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
BBIA0620E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2651E

● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[QR]
4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR A
EC
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. C
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR D

OK or NG
E
F
With CONSULT-II G
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine. H
valve opening. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. J
K
PBIB1786E
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE L

OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

[QR]
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 13.
BBIA0558E

attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LIS

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB2058E

[QR]
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control A
Air passage continuity
Condition EC
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
C
No supply No
PBIB2059E
D
Removal and Installation UBS00LIT
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E


DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[QR]
VALVE PFP:14920
Description UBS00L8E
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

EVAP canister EVAP canister purge volume
purge flow control control solenoid valve
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIB2057E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L8F

● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V even slightly, after engine starting)

VALVE
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L8G
A
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent EC
control solenoid valve circuit shorted.)
0444 to ECM through the valve
open ● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
C
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent
control solenoid valve circuit
0445 to ECM through the valve ● EVAP canister purge volume control
shorted
solenoid valve D
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L8H
NOTE: E
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. F
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. G
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-366, "Diagnostic Procedure" H
.
SEF058Y
K
WITH GST
L

VALVE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L8I
BBWA2412E

VALVE
[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
E
EVAP canister purge volume

45 R PBIB0050E
control solenoid valve
Approximately 1V F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than G
PBIB2652E H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V) K

VALVE
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LIP
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
harness connector.
BBIA0620E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control

tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2651E

● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG

VALVE
[QR]
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Start engine.
valve opening. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D
PBIB1786E
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 6.
H
I
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00L8K J
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control K
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
L
100% Yes
0% No
M
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
between A and B
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB2059E

VALVE
[QR]
Removal and Installation UBS00L8L


DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE PFP:14935
A
Component Description UBS00L8M
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent. EC
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative C
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened. D
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
PBIB1263E
Control System diagnoses.
E
H
BBIA0591E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L8N I

J
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L8O

K
P0447 EVAP canister vent control An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) L
0447 valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L8P
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L8Q
EC
BBWA1755E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LIQ
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1787E

[QR]
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connec-
tor. EC
BBIA0591E
E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0152E

● Harness connectors E41, C1 J
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
K
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND L
SHORT
M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[QR]
● Harness connectors C1, E41
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00L8S

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
PBIB1033E
5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.

6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B
ON No
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.

If OK, go to next step. PBIB1787E

[QR]
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again. A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
rusted.
C
E
PBIB1033E
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions. F
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
G
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes H
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E
If OK, go to next step. I

5. Perform step 3 again.
J

[QR]
Component Description UBS00LEN
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
opened.
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
PBIB1263E
Control System” diagnoses.
BBIA0591E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LEO

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LEP
P0448 EVAP canister vent control EVAP canister vent control valve remains and the circuit
0448 valve close closed under specified driving conditions. ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LEQ
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. D
5. Repeat next procedures 3 times.
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. E
Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds. F
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
G
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. H
K
PBIB0972E

L
WITH GST
M

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LER
BBWA1755E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 1.0V
111 BR
(Self shut-off) D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
E
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LES F

1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
I
BBIA0591E
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
M
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 6.
BBIA0558E

[QR]
attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness con-
nector.
BBIA0591E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LET

With CONSULT-II

[QR]
rusted. A
3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. EC
PBIB1033E
D
E
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B
ON No
OFF Yes F

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. G
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent

control valve using an air blower. H
Without CONSULT-II I
rusted. J
PBIB1033E
M
following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes


DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365
Component Description UBS00L8T
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the

purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pres-
sure increases.
BBIA0591E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L8U

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L8V
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-438, "DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
P0451 EVAP control system pressure ECM detects a sloshing signal from the ● Harness or connectors
0451 sensor performance EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L8W
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode C
with CONSULT-II.
NOTE: D
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-383, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
E
SEF194Y
F
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L8X
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS H

I
L
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
M
2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER

nector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
BBIA0591E

[QR]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

For wiring diagram, refer to EC-387, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00L8Y

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canis-
ter.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or PBIB1200E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

[QR]
A
Component Description UBS00L8Z

purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pres- EC
sure increases.
BBIA0591E
H
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L90 I

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J

K
NOTE:
L
P0452 EVAP control system pressure An excessively low voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) M
0452 sensor low input is sent to ECM.

[QR]
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
.
SEF194Y
WITH GST
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
.
PBIB1199E

[QR]
EC
BBWA1804E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
sensor
Sensor power supply
48 SB (EVAP control system pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
nector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0591E

[QR]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
D
PBIB0138E
E
F
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM G
H
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67. J
Continuity should exist. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. L
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

[QR]
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END


ter.
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
CAUTION:

[QR]
A

sure increases.
BBIA0591E
H
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00L97 I


K
NOTE:
L
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) M
EVAP control system ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
P0453 An excessively high voltage from the sensor
pressure sensor high ● EVAP canister vent control valve
0453 is sent to ECM.
input ● EVAP canister
● Rubber hose to EVAP canister vent control
valve

[QR]
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF194Y
WITH GST
.
PBIB1199E

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00L9A
EC
BBWA1804E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
sensor
Sensor power supply
48 SB (EVAP control system pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L9B

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
nector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0591E

[QR]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
D
PBIB0138E
E
F
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM G
H
SHORT
67. J
Continuity should exist. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. L
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M


[QR]
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.


2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

[QR]
12. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 13.
No >> GO TO 15. C
BBIA0558E E

F
attached.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
H
I
● EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
J
15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K

L
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00L9C
EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR M

ter.
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
CAUTION:
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L9D
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB1026E
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
EVAP control system has a very large leak ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
P0455 EVAP control system leaks
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control
0455 gross leak detected
system does not operate properly. ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
solenoid valve and the circuit
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L9E
A
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
● Make sure that EVAP hose are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC
properly.
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. C
TESTING CONDITION:
placed on flat level surface. D
● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II E
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until reteaching sound is heard.
with CONSULT-II.
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met. G
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE H
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
I
SEF475Y
PBIB0829E M
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with
CONSULT-II and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK
[P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-400, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC
P0442, EC-348, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEC763C

[QR]
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-63, "Driving Pattern" aaabefore driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
5. Select SERVICE $07 with GST.
● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-400, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L9F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

Check for air ratcheting sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Refer to EC-40, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[QR]
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-37, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" . EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. C

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. D
>> GO TO 7.
E
Check the following. F
● EVAP canister vent control is installed properly.
● EVAP canister vent control valve. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. H
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP I

NOTE: J
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
K
L
BBIA0620E
SEF916U

[QR]
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
PEF917U
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-II
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
BBIA0591E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
SEF200U

[QR]
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Start engine.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL C
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm. D
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB1786E
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION F
Without CONSULT-II
G
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. H
Vacuum should exist. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. J
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE K

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14. L
M
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
PBIB1786E

[QR]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
>> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00L9G
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak EC
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK. C
PBIB1026E I
● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve J
● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. K
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control L
valve.
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks M
● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
Evaporative emission ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
P0456 control system very
0456 small leak (negative ● EVAP system does not operate ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
pressure check) properly. ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
and the circuit
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-

[QR]
CAUTION:
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L9H
NOTE:
● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi-
cle for more than 1 hour.
– Fuel filler cap is removed.
– Refilled or drained the fuel.
– EVAP component parts is/are removed.
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool
place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output
voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the
range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then PBIB1953E
start from step 1).
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
PBIB0837E

NOTE:
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-76, "Basic Inspection" .

[QR]
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly. A
Overall Function Check UBS00L9I
WITH GST
EC
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system. C
● Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi). D
vice port.
E
G
BBIA0620E
2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.

H
3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
5. Connect GST and select Service $08. I
6. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat- J
isfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP SEF462UI
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and K
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
If OK, go to next step. L
8. Disconnect GST.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. M
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual.

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L9J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[QR]
pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of
EVAP service port. EC
NOTE:
EVAP service port may cause leaking. C
D
BBIA0620E
SEF916U
H
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. I

J
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
K
CAUTION: L

sure in the system. M
PEF917U
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

[QR]
Without CONSULT-II
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
BBIA0591E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Refer to EC-41, "Removal and Installation"
Refer to EC-374, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
BBIA0558E

[QR]
attached.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.

● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection E

F
With CONSULT-II G
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. H
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14. K
PBIB1786E
L
Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

[QR]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

>> GO TO 20.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.

[QR]
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24. EC
24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

D
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description UBS00L9K
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending
on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
BBIA0629E
On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00L9L
NOTE:
● If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
● If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.
Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit ● Harness or connectors
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor
0460 noise (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
to ECM.
● Combination meter
● Fuel level sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L9M
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
.
SEF195Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L9N
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00L9O E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
F

[QR]
Component Description UBS00L9P
BBIA0629E
On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00L9Q
NOTE:
● If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
(the CAN communication line is open or
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does shorted)
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even ● Harness or connectors
0461 range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
tance.
Overall Function Check UBS00L9R
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-12,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-85, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.

[QR]
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. A
7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-
II. EC
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-
5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. C
11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. SEF195Y
D
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
WITH GST E
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance. F
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-85, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. G
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. H
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
I
J
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . L

M
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00L9T
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR


DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description UBS00L9U
the combination meter. The combination meter. sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication.
BBIA0629E
On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00L9V
NOTE:
● If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
● If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1010. Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
0462 low input sent to ECM. (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0463 high input sent to ECM. ● Combination meter
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00L9W
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF195Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00L9X

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
C
D
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00L9Y E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
F

DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
Description UBS00L9Z
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communi-
cation line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LA0
NOTE:
● If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
shorted)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from ● Harness or connectors
P0500 (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
0500 shorted)
even when vehicle is being driven.
● Wheel sensor
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the fail-safe system for vehicle speed sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates (High) while
Vehicle speed sensor
engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LA1
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.

DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
onds. A
1,400 - 6,000 rpm (A/T)
ENG SPEED
1,800 - 6,000 rpm (M/T)
EC
Shift lever Except P or N position (A/T) C
Except Neutral position (M/T)
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
SEF196Y
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-421, "Diagnostic Procedure" D

.
Overall Function Check UBS00LA2
E
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
WITH GST F
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. G
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LA3
1. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” I
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER K

L
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM PFP:23781
Description UBS00LA4
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
P0506 Idle speed control system The idle speed is less than the target idle ● Electric throttle control actuator
0506 RPM lower than expected speed by 100 rpm or more. ● Intake air leak
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LA6
NOTE:
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-83, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-617,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LA7
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK A

2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. C
2. REPLACE ECM
D
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to E
5. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . F
G
>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Description UBS00LA8
NOTE:
operation, etc.).
P0507 Idle speed control system The idle speed is more than the target idle
● Intake air leak
0507 RPM higher than expected speed by 200 rpm or more.
● PCV system
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LAA
NOTE:
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-83, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LAB
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION A
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
3. REPLACE ECM
F
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to G
5. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . H
I
>> INSPECTION END

J

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763
Component Description UBS00LAC
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
BBIA0621E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LAD

● Engine: After warming up, idle Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
the engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LAE
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

NOTE:
P0550 Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0550 sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.
● Power steering pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LAF
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LAG
EC
BBWA1757E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.0V
12 P
0.4 - 0.8V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
68 G (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LAH

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness con-
nector.
D
BBIA0621E
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
in harness or connectors. G
SEF479Y H
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wirng Diagram. J

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wirng Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.

[QR]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LAI
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
Condition Voltage
Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0025E
Removal and Installation UBS00P0H

Refer to PS-26, "HYDRAULIC LINE" .

DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
A
Component Description UBS00LAV
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the EC
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Vol-
ume Learning value memory, etc.
C
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LAW
F
P0603 ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
ECM power supply circuit open or shorted.]
0603 properly.
● ECM G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LAX
NOTE: H
WITH CONSULT-II I
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. J
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times. K
.
L
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LAY
BBWA1758E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE C
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LAZ

D
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
MBIB0026E

● 20A fuse J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
K
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.

[QR]
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
With GST
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
A
Component Description UBS00LAJ
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the EC
engine.
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LAK
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605 G
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE H
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
I
● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A degrees) by the return spring.
● ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LAL
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION K
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
With CONSULT-II M
.
SEF058Y
With GST

DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
With CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
.
SEF058Y
With GST
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
.
SEF058Y
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LAM
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
2. REPLACE ECM A
1. Replace ECM.
BL-121, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . EC
5. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . C
D
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:18919
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LCX
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
(Battery current sensor circuit is shorted.)
(EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
P0643 Sensor power supply circuit ECM detects a voltage of power source is shorted.)
0643 short for sensor is excessively low or high.
(APP sensor 1)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
● Battery current sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LCY
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LCZ
EC
BBWA1764E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
49 P (Refrigerant pressure sensor, [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
Battery current sensor)
Sensor power supply
sensor)


Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
98 GR
106 R

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LD0

E
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness

connector.
H
BBIA0592E
K
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3. M
PBIB2608E
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 90.
Refer to wiring diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

[QR]
4. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-387
49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-611
49 Battery current sensor terminal 1 EC-461
68 PSP sensor terminal 3 EC-427
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK COMPONENTS
● EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection" .)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to MTC-16, "REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR" .)
● Battery current sensor (Refer to EC-465, "Component Inspection" .)
● Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-430, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
6. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH PFP:23006
A
Component Description UBS00LFC
When the shift lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LFD

C
Shift lever: Except above OFF D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LFE
E
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) circuit is open or shorted.] F
P0850 Park/neutral position
switch is not changed in the process of engine ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
0850 switch
starting and driving.
● TCM (A/T models) G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LFF
CAUTION: H
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at I
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow-
ing conditions. K
Position (Shift lever) Known-good signal

P or N position (A/T) L
ON
Neutral position (M/T)
Except the above position OFF
If NG, go to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M

If OK, go to following step. SEF212Y
onds.
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 - 31.8 msec (A/T)
5.0 - 31.8 msec (M/T)

[QR]
Overall Function Check UBS00LFG
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
Condition (shift position) Voltage (Known-good data)
P or N position (A/T)
Approx. 0 V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except the above position
(11 - 14V)

MBIB0043E

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LFH
EC
BBWA1930E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
102 PNP switch
O (M/T) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY BOLTAGE
● Shift lever: Except above position (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LFI
A/T MODELS
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Refer to AT-43, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and combination meter terminal 17.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and combination meter.

[QR]
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 7.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. D

Check the following. E
● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
F
7. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III G
1. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and TCM terminal 8.
Refer to AT-101, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace. L
9. REPLACE COMBINATION METER

M
>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
M/T MODELS
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3
NG >> GO TO 2.

● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ECM
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH

Refer to MT-11, "POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
[QR]
DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL PFP:22690
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LCE

EC
The closed loop control function does not [The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
P1148 open or shorted.] C
Closed loop control function operate even when vehicle is driving in the
1148
specified condition. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
D
NOTE:
DTC P1148 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.
E

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LID
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
● Cooling fan (crankshaft driven)
● Cooling fan does not operate properly ● Radiator hose
(Overheat).
● Radiator
● Cooling fan system does not operate
● Radiator cap
Engine over temperature properly (Overheat).
P1217 ● Water pump
(Overheat) ● Engine coolant was not added to the
system using the proper filling method. ● Thermostat
● Engine coolant is not within the specified ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
range. For more information, refer to EC-452, "Main
12 Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine
Coolant" , “Changing Engine Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil.
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check UBS00LIE
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the engine coolant over temperature enrichment protection
check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
NOTE:
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-451,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-451,
3. Start engine.
SEF621W
4. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates.
WITH GST
NOTE:
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps
and go to EC-451, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[QR]
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps
and go to EC-451, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A
3. Start engine and make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine. EC
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LIF
C
1. CHECK COOLING FAN (CRANKSHAFT DRIVEN) OPERATION
D
2. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates normally.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. E
NG >> Check cooling fan (crankshaft driven). Refer to CO-18, "COOLING FAN" .
2. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

F
Refer to CO-8, "COOLING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> Check the following for leak.
● Hose
● Radiator H
● Water pump
● Reservoir tank
I
3. CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Refer to CO-15, "RADIATOR" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace radiator cap. K
4. CHECK THERMOSTAT
Refer to CO-21, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace thermostat. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
6. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-452, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Main 12 Causes of Overheating UBS00LIG
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-13, "ANTI-
FREEZE COOLANT MIX-
TURE RATIO" .
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level See CO-11, "Changing
in reservoir tank and radi- Engine Coolant" .
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 98 - 118 kPa (0.99 - 1.20 See CO-10, "CHECKING
kg/cm2 , 14 - 17 psi) RESERVOIR CAP" .
ON*1 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See CO-10, "CHECKING

COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS" .
ON*1 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See CO-21, "THERMO-
lower radiator hoses STAT AND THERMO-
STAT HOUSING" and
CO-15, "RADIATOR" .
See CO-18, "COOLING
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● Visual Operating
FAN" .
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemi- Negative —
cal tester 4 Gas ana-
lyzer
ON*2 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driv- See CO-11, "Changing
reservoir tank ing and idling Engine Coolant" .
OFF*3 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See CO-10, "System
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank Check" .
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-60, "CYLINDER
gauge mum distortion (warping) HEAD" .
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-75, "CYLINDER
tons walls or piston BLOCK" .
*1: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*2: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*3: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description UBS00LCN

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, C
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the D
PBIB0145E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LCO

P1225 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning value is ● Electric throttle control actuator
1225 performance problem excessively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LCP
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at H
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. I
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. J
K
.
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LCQ
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
BBIA0623E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LCR


DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[QR]
A
Component Description UBS00LCS

output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, C
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the D
PBIB0145E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LCT

P1226 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning is not performed ● Electric throttle control actuator
1226 performance problem successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LCU
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at H
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
K
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
.
L
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LCV

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0623E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LCW


DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL
[QR]
DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL PFP:23710
A
Description UBS00RY8
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started with prewarming up condition.
This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the catalyst and reduces emissions. EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00RY9
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause C
ECM does not control ignition timing and engine ● Lack of intake air volume
P1421 Cold start emission reduction
idle speed properly when engine is started with ● Fuel injection system
1421 strategy monitoring
prewarming up condition. ● ECM D
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00RYA
NOTE: E
● If DTC P1421 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC. F
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II G
H
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is between 4°C
(39°F) and 36°C (97°F).
I
If "COOLAN TEMP/S" indication is within the specified value, go
If "COOLANT TEMP/S" indication is out of the specified value,
cool engine down or warm engine up and go to step 1. J
5. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes.
. K
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00RYB
1. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING M

Perform EC-83, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.

Check for the cause of intake air volume lacking. Refer to the following.
● Crushed intake air passage
● Intake air passage clogging
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part

[QR]
3. CHECK FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Perform EC-276, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" for DTC P0171.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to EC-280, "Diagnostic Procedure" for DTC P0171.

With CONSULT-II
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-121, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR PFP:294G0
A
Component Description UBS00M0S
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel con-

sumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is EC
caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery cur-
rent sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal.
The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the bat-
tery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the C
power generation voltage variable control is performed. When per-
forming the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calcu-
lates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor D
signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power genera-
tion command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power gen-
BBIA0630E
eration voltage variable control, refer to SC section.
E
CAUTION:
Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The con-
nection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery
discharge may occur. F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00M0T
Specification data are reference values. G

H
● Battery: Fully charged*
I
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00M0U

J

NOTE:
K
L
The output voltage of the battery current ● Harness or connectors
P1550 Battery current sensor circuit (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
sensor remains within the specified
1550 range/performance
range while engine is running. ● Battery current sensor
M

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00M0V
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00M0W
EC
BBWA1783E

[QR]
CAUTION:
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
71 R Battery current sensor ● Battery: Fully charged* Approximately 2.6 - 3.5 V
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00M0X

2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body.
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect battery current sensor harness connector.
EC
D
BBIA0630E
3. Check voltage between battery current sensor terminal 1 and E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIB2609E
H

I
● Harness for open or short between battery current sensor and ECM J
K
4. CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
3. Check harness continuity between battery current sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between battery current sensor and ECM

[QR]
6. CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

8. CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace battery negative cable assembly.

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00M0Y
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR A

2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body EC
ground.
C
E
BBIA0631E
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor

signal) and ground. F
Voltage: Approximately 2.5V

6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. G
PBIB2617E
I

DTC P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR PFP:294G0
Component Description UBS00M0Z

sumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is
tery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the
lates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor
BBIA0630E
CAUTION:
discharge may occur.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00M10

● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00M11

NOTE:
If DTC P1551 or P1552 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-438, "DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
P1551 Battery current sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the
1551 low input sensor is sent to ECM.
P1552 Battery current sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the
1552 high input sensor is sent to ECM.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00M12
A
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V with ignition EC
switch ON
WITH CONSULT-II
D
.
E
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00M13
BBWA1783E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
● Idle speed
*: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to SC-5, "SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK" . F
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00M14
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G

H
BBIA0614E
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 2.
M

[QR]
2. CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
BBIA0630E
3. Check voltage between battery current sensor terminal 1 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2609E

>> Repair circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


[QR]
6. CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
● Harness connectors E5, F14 E
F

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. H
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

J
>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00M15
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body
ground.
BBIA0631E

signal) and ground.
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly.
PBIB2617E

[QR]
A
Component Description UBS00M16

BBIA0630E
E
CAUTION:

H
I
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00M18

J

NOTE:
K
L
The signal voltage transmitted from the ● Harness or connectors
P1553 Battery current sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
sensor to ECM is higher than the amount
1553 performance
of the maximum power generation. ● Battery current sensor
M

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00M19
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00M1A
EC
BBWA1783E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00M1B

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
EC
D
BBIA0630E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIB2609E
H

I
K
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


[QR]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00M1C
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR A

3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body EC
ground.
C
E
BBIA0631E

signal) and ground. F

6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. G
PBIB2617E
I

[QR]
Component Description UBS00M1D

BBIA0630E
CAUTION:
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00M1E

● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00M1F

NOTE:

P1554 Battery current sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
sensor is lower than the specified value
1554 performance
while the battery voltage is high enough. ● Battery current sensor
Overall Function Check UBS00M1G
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the battery current sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 12.8V at idle.
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that all load switches and A/C switch are
turned OFF.
WITH CONSULT-II

[QR]
2. Select “BAT CUR SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. A
3. Check “BAT CUR SEN” indication for 10 seconds.
“BAT CUR SEN” should be above 2,300mV at least once.
4. If NG, go to EC-483, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC
PBIB2615E
D
WITH GST
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor E
signal) and ground for 10 seconds.
The voltage should be above 2.3V at least once.
F
PBIB2616E
H

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00M1H
BBWA1783E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00M1I

H
BBIA0614E
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 2.
M

[QR]
BBIA0630E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2609E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


[QR]
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
F

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. H

J
>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00M1J

ground.
BBIA0631E

signal) and ground.
PBIB2617E

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
A
Component Description UBS00LEU
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated. EC
E
PBIB2645E
Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LEV

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION G
H
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed ON I
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released OFF
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON J
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LEW
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. K

NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to L
EC-435, "DTC P0605 ECM" .
● An excessively high voltage signal from the
M
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
P1564 ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ASCD steering switch
1564 steering switch is out of the specified range. ● ASCD steering switch
● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is ● ECM
stuck ON.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LEX
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and
wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds,
then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release
it and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF058Y

WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LEY
EC
BBWA2834E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2V
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LEZ

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT A
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW and “CAN-
CEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
C
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication
Pressed ON
MAIN switch MAIN SW
Released OFF D
Pressed ON
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW
Released OFF
E
SEC006D
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
switch Released OFF
Pressed ON F
SET/COAST switch SET SW
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-II G
H
pressing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V]
Pressed Approx. 0 I
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4.0
Pressed Approx. 1.0
CANCEL switch J
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 3.0

switch Released Approx. 4.0 PBIB0311E
K
Pressed Approx. 2.0
SET/COAST switch
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M
3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 17 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[QR]
● Combination switch (spiral cable)
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 16.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch.

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00LF0
ASCD STEERING SWITCH A

1. Disconnect combinationswitch (spiral cable) harness connector M102.
2. Check continuity between ASCD steering switch terminals 16
and 17 with pushing each switch. EC
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]

Pressed Approx. 0 C
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4,000
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL switch
Released Approx. 4,000 D
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 1,480

switch Released Approx. 4,000 PBIB3454E
E
Pressed Approx. 660
SET SW/COAST switch
F
If NG, replace ASCD steering switch.

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description UBS00LF1
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)"
for the ASCD function.
BBIA0560E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LF2

● Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully ON
BRAKE SW1 released (M/T)
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LF3

NOTE:
● If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-435, "DTC P0605 ECM" .
● This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
● When the vehicle speed is above ● Harness or connectors
30km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A) the stop lamp switch and the ASCD ● Harness or connectors
brake switch are sent to ECM at the (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
same time.
(The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.)
(M/T models)
P1572 ● Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch
1572 ● ASCD brake switch
● ASCD brake switch signal is not sent
● ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
B) to ECM for extremely long time while
the vehicle is driving ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
● Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation
(M/T models)
● ECM

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LF4
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait EC
● Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be C
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a D
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. E
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights
up. F
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
G
H
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step. PBIB2386E
I
5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) J
Depress the brake pedal for more than
Driving location 5 seconds so as not to come off from K
the above-mentioned vehicle speed.
WITH GST L
M

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LF5
BBWA1859E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF] C
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V) D
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
Approximately 0V
● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly E
depressed (M/T)
● Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE F
● Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully (11 - 14V)
released (M/T)
G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LF6
A/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I H
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
J
CONDITION INDICATION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON K
SEC011D
M
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E

[QR]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 7.
MBIB0060E
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
BBIA0560E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

[QR]
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E160
● 10A fuse EC
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. G
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. I
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. K
BBIA0560E
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB1184E

[QR]
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
9. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
M/T MODELS
A
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
C
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed OFF D
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released ON
SEC011D
F
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the G
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
H
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E J

[QR]
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
PBIB1677E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 10.
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
BBIA0624E
4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and

ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0799E

[QR]
4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
BBIA0560E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. G
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB0857E

● Fuse block (J/B) connector E160 J
● 10A fuse
K
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

[QR]
8. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
BBIA0560E

with CONSULT -II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0117E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse

[QR]
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D

Refer to EC-506, "Component Inspection" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. F

G
>> INSPECTION END H

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00LF7
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Condition Continuity
Brake pedal: Fully released Should exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,

"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2
Clutch pedal: Fully released Should exist
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-6,

"CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC024D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
PBIB2285E
Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
A
Component Description UBS00MKI
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina-
tion meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD EC
control. Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00MKJ
C
NOTE:
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC D
Refer to EC-159, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . E
Refer to EC-420, "DTC P0500 VSS" .
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. F
G
shorted.)
H
(The combination meter circuit is open or
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle shorted.)
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range. ● Combination meter I
● Wheel sensor
● TCM (A/T models) J
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00MKK

K
CAUTION:
NOTE: L
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test M
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH).
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00MKL

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check combination meter function.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[QR]
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:31935
A
Description UBS00N5D
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this
signal for engine control. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00N5E

C
Almost the same speed as the
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12MPH)
tachometer indication D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00N5F
NOTE: E
● If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
● If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1010 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.
F
Refer to EC-321, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)" .
G
Refer to EC-328, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" .
Refer to EC-435, "DTC P0605 ECM" . H
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
Turbine revolution sensor signal is different shorted)
P1715
Input speed sensor
from the theoretical value calculated by
J
(Turbine revolution sensor) ● Harness or connectors
1715 ECM from revolution sensor signal and
(TCM output) (Turbine revolution sensor circuit is open
engine rpm signal.
or shorted)
● TCM K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00N5G
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM L
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to AT-43, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Description UBS00LFR
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LFS

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LFT

P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
Brake switch shorted.)
1805 extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
● Stop lamp switch
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be
poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LFU
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
.
PBIB1952E
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LFV
EC
BBWA1931E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LFW
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

BBIA0560E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB2284E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

[QR]
● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E160 EC
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
C
D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
5. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. I
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J

K
>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00LFX
STOP LAMP SWITCH

BBIA0560E
PBIB2285E
Conditions Continuity

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[QR]
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
A
Component Description UBS00LBJ
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends EC
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LBK

D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LBL

E
These self-diagnoses have one trip detection logic.

P2100 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2100 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open) G
● Throttle control motor relay
P2103 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is H
2103 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode J
spring.
K
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LBM
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and L
With CONSULT-II M
SEF058Y
With GST

[QR]
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
With GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LBN
EC
BBWA1812E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE
power supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V

4 L/W
PBIB0534E
0 - 14V

5 L/B
PBIB0533E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LBO
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1171E

[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. D
3. CHECK FUSE E
1. Disconnect 20A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
G
4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the fol- H
lowing conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage
I
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5. MBIB0028E K
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

M
4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

[QR]
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
A
Description UBS00LBC
NOTE:
If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or 2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100 EC
or P2119. Refer to EC-515, "DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY" or EC-532,
"DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR" .
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. C
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition. D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LBD
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. E

P2101 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted) F
2101 performance problem not operate properly.
FAIL-SAFE MODE G
H
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LBE I

NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine is run-
ning. K
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LBF
BBWA1811E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V D
4 L/W E
PBIB0534E F
0 - 14V

G
5 L/B
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed H
PBIB0533E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF] I
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LBG
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS K

L
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1171E
4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

[QR]
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II A
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 6. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. D
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E

F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
Refer to EC-147, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" . I
9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT J
K
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
L
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist M
5
4 Should exist
5 Should exist BBIA0623E
6
4 Should not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

[QR]
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
BBIA0623E
11. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LBH
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB2606E
Removal and Installation UBS00LBI


DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description UBS00LBP
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LBQ C
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
2118 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator E
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. F
G
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LBR
H
NOTE:
I
WITH CONSULT-II
K
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LBS
BBWA1813E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V D
4 L/W E
PBIB0534E F
0 - 14V

G
5 L/B
PBIB0533E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LBT
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS K

L
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
5
4 Should exist
6
4 Should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LBU

step.
PBIB2606E

[QR]
Removal and Installation UBS00LBV
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A

EC

DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[QR]
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
Component Description UBS00LB8
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LB9

Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
P2119 Electric throttle control
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is ● Electric throttle control actuator
2119 actuator B)
not in specified range.
C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The
Malfunction A
engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C The engine can restart in N or P (A/T), Neutral (M/T), and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LBA
NOTE:
● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
3. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait
at least 3 seconds.
4. Set shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T).
7. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait
at least 3 seconds.
8. Set shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T).
9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn SEF058Y
ON.
With GST

[QR]
With CONSULT-II A
EC
3. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and wait
at least 3 seconds.
4. Set shift lever to N, P position (A/T) or Neutral (M/T) position.
C
D
SEF058Y
E
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LBB
F

1. Remove the intake air duct. G
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 2.
control actuator inside. I
J
BBIA0623E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR K

2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . L
>> INSPECTION END M

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description UBS00LFY
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LFZ

ACCEL SEN 2* (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LG0

NOTE:
P2122 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
2122 sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LG1
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LG2
BBWA1747E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor ground [Engine is running] C

Sensor ground [Engine is running] D

Sensor power supply E
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply F
sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON] G
98 GR
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON] H
106 R J
K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LG3

L
M
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
connector.
BBIA0592E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2608E
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[QR]
C
>> INSPECTION END

D
>> INSPECTION END E
Component Inspection UBS00LG4
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

F
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- G
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage H
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
I
MBIB0023E
J
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next
step.
5. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . K
L
Removal and Installation UBS00LG5
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
M

[QR]
Component Description UBS00LG6

signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LG7


CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LG8

P2127 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
2127 sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LG9
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LGA
BBWA1748E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

82 B (Accelerator pedal position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V D

83 B (Accelerator pedal position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
Sensor power supply
90 L (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
91 G (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V G
sensor 2)
● Engine: Stopped 0.3 - 0.45V H
98 GR
● Engine: Stopped Less than 2.4V I
● Engine: Stopped 0.6 - 0.95V J
106 R
K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LGB L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
connector.
BBIA0592E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2611E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[QR]
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A
3. Perform EC-83, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC
>> INSPECTION END

C
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6. H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. J
9. CHECK APP SENSOR K

OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY M

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00LGC

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
conditions.

MBIB0023E

step.
Removal and Installation UBS00LGD
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
A
Component Description UBS00LGE

into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LGF

F
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2* G
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal.
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LGG

● Harness or connector
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.) J
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P2135
circuit range/performance compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135 ● Electric throttle control actuator
problem and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
K
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode M
degrees.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LGH
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LGI
EC
BBWA1819E

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensor power supply
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LGJ

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A
EC
D
BBIA0616E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB2604E H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00LGK
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR A

69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi- C
tions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage D
Fully released Less than 4.75V E
69
F
step.
8. Perform EC-83, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G
Removal and Installation UBS00LGL

Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . H

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description UBS00LGM

signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LGN


CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LGO

NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
(The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
or shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
P2138
sensor circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from APP sensor
2138 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
mance problem 1 and APP sensor 2.
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LGP
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LGQ
BBWA1749E

[QR]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

82 B (Accelerator pedal position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V D

83 B (Accelerator pedal position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
Sensor power supply
90 L (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
91 G (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V G
sensor 2)
● Engine: Stopped 0.3 - 0.45V H
98 GR
● Engine: Stopped Less than 2.4V I
● Engine: Stopped 0.6 - 0.95V J
106 R
K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LGR L

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[QR]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
connector.
BBIA0592E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2608E

Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2611E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[QR]
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 7.
F
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. G
H
>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. J
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 5
and ECM terminal 83.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
M
9. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

[QR]
10. CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LGS

conditions.

MBIB0023E

step.
Removal and Installation UBS00LGT
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

DTC P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1 PFP:22693
A
Component Description UBS00LDF
sor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst con- EC
C
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the D
E
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to F
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LDG

I
J
2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00P0D

K
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is mon-
itored not to be shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause L
● The output voltage computed by ECM from the ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is shifted to ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
P2A00 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 the lean side for a specified period. M
● Fuel pressure
2A00 circuit range/performance ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is shifted to the ● Fuel injector
rich side for a specified period. ● Intake air leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LDI
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SULT-II.

[QR]
4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
8. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 min-
utes.
.
PBIB2035E
WITH GST
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. BBIA0622E
utes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-564, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LDJ
EC
BBWA2838E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LDK

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.
BBIA0617E

[QR]
3. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK A
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 4.
C
4. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.
With CONSULT-II D
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. E
Is it difficult to start engine? F
SEF215Z
H
Without CONSULT-II I
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. J
nector. K
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . L
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? BBIA0622E M
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 5.

[QR]
5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
BBIA0617E

BBIA0617E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

[QR]

1 16 C
2 75
5 35
D
6 56

E
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER H

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 11.
L
M
CAUTION:
>> GO TO 12.

[QR]
12. CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB3201E

With CONSULT-II
PBIB2035E
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
>> GO TO 14. BBIA0622E

[QR]
14. CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. EC
3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
>> INSPECTION END C
PBIB3201E
E
Removal and Installation UBS00LIK

Refer to EM-21, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . F

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description UBS00LHN
When depress on the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch is turned

the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal)
Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)"
for the ASCD function.
BBIA0560E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LHO

● Clutch pedal and brake pedal: ON
BRAKE SW1 Fully released (M/T)
BRAKE SW2 ● Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(Stop lamp switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LHP
EC
BBWA1864E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V

Approximately 0V
● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly
depressed (M/T)
released (M/T)

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LHQ
A/T MODELS A

With CONSULT-II EC
C
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF D
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
F
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
G
following conditions. H
CONDITION VOLTAGE
I
MBIB0061E
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3. L

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0060E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
BBIA0560E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0857E

● 10A fuse
K

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
BBIA0560E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB1184E

● 10A fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
M/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I C
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. D
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. E
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
F
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released ON
G
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II H
following conditions. I
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V J
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. K
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E
L

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
lowing conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0060E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT

BBIA0624E

ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
BBIA0560E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. G
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB0857E

● 10A fuse
K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
8. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch

BBIA0560E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0117E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

G
>> INSPECTION END H

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00LIJ
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
Brake pedal: Fully released Should exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist

SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

Clutch pedal: Fully released Should exist
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist

SEC024D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

PBIB2285E

ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814
A
Component Description UBS00LHR
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter. EC
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
C
● CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
● SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of
ASCD setting.
D
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LHS E
Specification data are reference value.
F
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st
time → at the 2nd time
G
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89 MPH)
H

ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LHT
BBWA2419E

ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LHU
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.

ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION EC
MAIN switch: Pressed at the
1st time → at the 2nd time
C
ASCD: Not operating OFF
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH)
D
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
E
2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed. F
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001, refer to EC-156, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" . G
No >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
NG >> Go to DI-7, "Arrangement of Combination Meter" .

K
>> INSPECTION END

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
Description UBS00LHL
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line
from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LIH

Lighting switch: 2nd position ON
Lighting switch: OFF. OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan: Operating ON

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LII
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following
conditions.
Condition Indication
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0103E
2. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-27, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYS-
TEM -" .
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
[QR]
FUEL INJECTOR PFP:16600
A
Component Description UBS00LH5
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec- EC
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains C
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
D
SEF375Z
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LH6

B/FUEL SCHDL ● See EC-137, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
G
INJ PULSE-B1
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 4.0 msec
● No load
H

FUEL INJECTOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LH7
BBWA2418E

FUEL INJECTOR
[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on E
rpm at idle.
41 R Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE F

(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
G
H
PBIB0530E
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LH8
1. INSPECTION START
J
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No K
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4.
L
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II M
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0133E

FUEL INJECTOR
[QR]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Clicking noise should exist.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1986E
4. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
BBIA0625E

4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0582E

● Harness connectors F44, F101
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse

FUEL INJECTOR
[QR]
6. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. D
NG >> GO TO 7.

F
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and ECM
Refer to EC-591, "Component Inspection" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel injector. I

J
>> INSPECTION END K

Component Inspection UBS00LH9
FUEL INJECTOR
1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector. L
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.3Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
M
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation UBS00LHA
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .

FUEL PUMP
[QR]
FUEL PUMP PFP:17042
Description UBS00LHB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage*
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine start-
ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that
the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the
ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
BBIA0529E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LHC

ON

FUEL PUMP
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LHD
EC
BBWA1824E

FUEL PUMP
[QR]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
113 V Fuel pump relay
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
ON
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LIU

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0626E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E

FUEL PUMP
[QR]
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 46 and ground with
Voltage: Battery voltage EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
C
NG >> GO TO 12.
D
PBIB2656E
Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
F
5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III G

3. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con- H
nector.
I
BBIA0545E
K
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 second

after ignition switch is turned ON. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0795E
6. CHECK 15A FUSE

3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse.

FUEL PUMP
[QR]
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CURCUIT-IV
2. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and IPDM E/R termi-
nal 13.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 8.

● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and IPDM E/R
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground
11. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.

OK or NG

FUEL PUMP
[QR]
Component Inspection UBS00LHF
FUEL PUMP A
nector.
EC
D
BBIA0545E
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” E
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
F
SEC918C H
Removal and Installation UBS00LHG
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-6, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . I

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
Component Description UBS00LGU
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition
coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
BBIA0604E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LGV
EC
BBWA2415E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
111 BR ECM relay (Self shut-off) switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V)

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
EC
BBWA2416E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
PBIB0521E
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1
81 G Ignition signal No. 2
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0522E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
EC
BBWA2417E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle.
PBIB0521E
61 L Ignition signal No. 3
80 GR Ignition signal No. 4
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0522E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LGW
1. CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that each circuit produce a momentary engine speed
drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
EC
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81
and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below. C
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
D
E
PBIB1204E
PBIB0521E
OK or NG F
NG >> GO TO 10.
G
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. H
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-148, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- J
CUIT" .
K
MBIB0034E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect condenser-1 harness connector.
BBIA0628E
4. Check voltage between condenser-1 terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3 and condenser-1 terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Harness for open or short between condenser-1 and IPDM E/R

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
8. CHECK CONDENSER-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between condenser-1 terminal 2 and ground.

3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D
9. CHECK CONDENSER-1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser-1. F
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

G
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. H
BBIA0604E K
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with

L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0138E

● Harness connector E2, F32
● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F32

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LGX
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

CAUTION:
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. PBIB0847E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
NOTE: A
8. Start engine. EC
pressure.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. BBIA0534E
12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be D

checked.
14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. E
as shown in the figure. F
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
Spark should be generated. G
CAUTION:
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock H
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage PBIB2325E
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. I
NOTE:
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. J
CONDENSER-1
K
3. Check resistance between condenser-1 terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)] L
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation UBS00LGY

Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" .

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
Component Description UBS00LHH
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
BBIA0627E
PBIB2657E

[QR]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LHI
EC
BBWA1776E

[QR]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
70 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LHJ
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1188E

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[QR]
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
EC
D
BBIA0627E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. G
PBIB1872E
H

I
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor J

K
5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

[QR]
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.


OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
Removal and Installation UBS00LHK

Refer to MTC-108, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[QR]
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
A
Wiring Diagram UBS00LHV
EC
BBWA2420E

[QR]
BBWA2467E

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
A
Fuel Pressure UBS00LHW
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.57kg/cm2 , 51psi)

EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing UBS00LHX
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm

Target idle speed No load*1 [in P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T)] M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm C
Air conditioner: ON In P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T) 725 rpm or more*2
Ignition timing In P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T) 15° ± 5° BTDC
D
*1: Under the following conditions:
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan) E
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
*2: If refrigerant pressure is low, the idle speed may not be increased.
F
Calculated Load Value UBS00LHY
Conditions Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

At idle 10 - 35 G
At 2,500 rpm 10 - 35
Mass Air Flow Sensor UBS00LHZ H

Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle 0.9 - 1.2V*
I
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
J
Intake Air Temperature Sensor UBS00LI0

K
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 0.283 - 0.359
L
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor UBS00LI1

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 M
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater UBS00LI2
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater UBS00LI3
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) UBS00LI4

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) UBS00LI5

[QR]
Throttle Control Motor UBS00LI6
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Fuel Injector UBS00LI7
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.3Ω
Fuel Pump UBS00LI8

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
A
DTC No. Index UBS00LJN
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3 D
GST*
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-766
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-766 E

U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) EC-769
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — F
MAY BE REQUIRED.
G
P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-775

P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-775 H
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-783
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-783
P0051 0051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-775 I
P0052 0052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-775
P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-783
J
P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-783
P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-792
P0081 0081 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 EC-792 K
L
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-815 M
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-825
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-825
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-832
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR EC-835
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-838
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-840
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-849
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-857
P0133 0133 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-865
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-877
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-889

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-903
P0150 0150 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-840
P0151 0151 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-849
P0152 0152 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-857
P0153 0153 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-865
P0157 0157 HO2S2 (B2) EC-877
P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) EC-889
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) EC-903
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-938
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-947
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-947
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-954
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-967
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-989
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-995

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*3
GST*2
P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-1040 EC
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-1048
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-1055
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-1064 C
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-1066
D
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 EC-1070
P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM EC-1072 E
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-1076
F
P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-1081
P0605 0605 ECM EC-1085
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-1088 G
P0700 0700 TCM AT-105
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-106
H
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-128
P0717 0717 TURBINE SENSOR AT-110
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 AT-112 I
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-119
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-121
J
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-123
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-1093
P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-1099 K
P1168 1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 EC-1099
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-1100
L
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-1101
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-1102
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING EC-1113 M
P1421 1421 COLD START CONTROL EC-1117
P1564 1564 ASCD SW EC-1147
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-1154
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN EC-1167
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-656
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED EC-1169
P1730 1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-135

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
P1752 1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-140
P1754 1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-142
P1757 1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-144
P1759 1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-146
P1762 1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-148
P1764 1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-150
P1767 1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-152
P1769 1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-154
P1772 1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-156
P1774 1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-158
P1800 1800 VIAS S/V CIRC EC-1170
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-1175
P2101 2101 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-1186
P2118 2118 ETC MOT EC-1192
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR EC-1197
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1199
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1199
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1205
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1205
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-1212
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-1219

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
Alphabetical Index UBS00LJO
A
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
● If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer EC
to EC-769, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
DTC*1 C
Items
ECM*3
GST*2
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 EC-840 D
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 EC-849
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-857
E
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 EC-865
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 EC-840 F
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 EC-849
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 EC-857
G
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 EC-865
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 EC-775 H
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 EC-775
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 EC-775
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 EC-775
I
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 AT-135
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 AT-121 J
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-1199
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 EC-1199
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 EC-1205 K
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 EC-1205
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-1219
L
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 EC-1154
ASCD SW P1564 1564 EC-1147
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 EC-1167 M
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 AT-128
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-1175
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 4 EC-766
1000*
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-967
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 EC-1099
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 EC-1099

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
COLD START CONTROL P1421 1421 EC-1117
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 EC-769
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 AT-148
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 AT-150
ECM P0605 0605 EC-1085
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 EC-1081
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 EC-832
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-1102
ETC ACTR P2119 2119 EC-1197
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P2101 2101 EC-1186
ETC MOT P2118 2118 EC-1192
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 EC-1048
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 EC-989
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 EC-995
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 EC-1055
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 AT-144
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 AT-146
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 EC-938
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 EC-1064
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 EC-1066
FUEL LEVL SEW/CIRC P0463 0463 EC-1068

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*3
GST*2
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 EC-927 EC
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 EC-927
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 AT-154
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 AT-152 C
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 EC-877
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-889
D
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-903
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 EC-877
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 EC-889 E
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 EC-903
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 EC-783
F
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 EC-783
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 EC-783
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 EC-783 G
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 AT-140
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 AT-142
H
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 EC-835 I
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 EC-1169
J
K
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-962 L
M
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 AT-123
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 AT-158
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 AT-156
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-954
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EC-656
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 EC-1093
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 AT-106

INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 EC-1076
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 EC-1088
TCM P0700 0700 AT-105
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 AT-119
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 EC-1100
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 EC-1101
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 EC-838
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-947
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-947
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-825
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-825
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-1212
TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 AT-110
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 AT-112

5 P0500 0500 EC-1070
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*
VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 EC-1170

PRECAUTIONS
[VQ]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” UBS00LJP
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EC
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: D
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. F
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover UBS00S57
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover,

cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. H
PIIB3706J
K
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T UBS00LJQ
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. L
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, M
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-83, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.

PRECAUTIONS
[VQ]
Precaution UBS00LJR
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned OFF.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect negative battery cable.
SEF289H
● Do not disassemble ECM.

● If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
● If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-
related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
PBIB1164E
– Test values
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with levers as far as they will go as shown at right.
PBIB1512E
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

PRECAUTIONS
[VQ]
● Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop- A
erly. Refer to EC-716, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value"
.
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. EC
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator. C
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents. MEF040D
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), D
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. E
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
F
SEF217U
H
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and I
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
J
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SEF348N

PRECAUTIONS
[VQ]
● B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown
in the figure.
SEC893C
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
BBIA0529E
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.

PREPARATION
[VQ]
PREPARATION PFP:00002
A
Special Service Tools UBS00LJT
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
EC
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
EG17650301 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and ra-
(J-33984-A) diator filler neck C
Radiator cap tester a: 28 (1.10) dia.
adapter b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in) D
S-NT564
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor E

(J-36471-A) with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
wrench
F
S-NT379
G
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
(J-38365) a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
wrench H
S-NT636
I
(J-44626) Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sen-
sor wrench J
K
LEM054
(J-44321) Checking fuel pressure

Fuel pressure gauge L
kit
LEC642
(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connec-

Fuel pressure gauge tor type fuel lines.
adapter
LBIA0376E
(J-45488) Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine

Quick connector re- room
lease
PBIC0198E

PREPARATION
[VQ]
Commercial Service Tools UBS00LJU
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak
i.e.: (J-41416)
S-NT703
EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service

adapter port
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
S-NT704
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (MLR-8382) pressure
S-NT815
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907)
S-NT779

[VQ]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
A
System Diagram UBS00LJV
EC
PBIB2773E

[VQ]
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System UBS00LJW

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position & mixture ratio Fuel injector
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2

*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation

[VQ]
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
A
EC
PBIB3020E D
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The E
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-849, "DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1" . This maintains the mixture
ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. F
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2. G
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. H
● Deceleration and acceleration
● Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit I
● Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
J
● During warm-up
● After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
● When starting the engine K
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to L
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. M
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN com-
pared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and
an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

[VQ]
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System UBS00LJX


Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control
Knock sensor Engine knocking
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1-2-3-4-5-6
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Comput-
ing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
● At starting
● During warm-up
● At idle
● At low battery voltage

[VQ]
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed A
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. EC
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) UBS00LJY

C

Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position D
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Fuel cut con-
Fuel injector
trol
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) E
F
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
G
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-634, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System" H
.

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
[VQ]
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL PFP:23710
Input/Output Signal Chart UBS00LJZ

Air conditioner switch 1
Air conditioner ON signal*
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
cut control
Battery 2
Battery voltage*
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
System Description UBS00LK0
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

[VQ]
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930
A

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (M/T) Clutch pedal operation C
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation Electric throttle control
ASCD vehicle speed control
actuator
Park/Neutral position (PNP)
Gear position D
switch
TCM Powertrain revolution* E
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

F
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). G
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control. H
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION I
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) J
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. K
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
L
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
● CANCEL switch is pressed
● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) M
● Brake pedal is depressed
● Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models)
● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T models)
● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
● VDC system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.

[VQ]
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN
switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition
must meet following conditions.
● Brake pedal is released
● Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
● Selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models)
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
Component Description UBS00LK2
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-1147 .
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-1180 , EC-1186 , EC-1192 and EC-1197 .
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-1252 .

CAN COMMUNICATION
[VQ]
CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
A
Refer to LAN-48, "CAN System Specification Chart" , about CAN communication for detail.

[VQ]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
Description UBS00LK4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB1631E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.

[VQ]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
A
EC
PBIB2774E

[VQ]
BBIA0594E

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LK5
EVAP CANISTER A
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
EC
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
C
sure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage. D
PBIB2568E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP) E
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
H
SEF445Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

I
Pressure: 2
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm , 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: J
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2
, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. K
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor-
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF943S
L
Refer to EC-1016 .
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR M
Refer to EC-942 .
Refer to EC-1023 .
Refer to EC-1039 .

[VQ]
EVAP SERVICE PORT
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
SEF462UA
Removal and Installation UBS00LK6
EVAP CANISTER
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
BBIA0566E

1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
BBIA0567E
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage UBS00LK7
CAUTION:
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.

[VQ]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. A
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
EC
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen. C
E
PEF838U
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure

F
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
pump.
G
PEF917U
I
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-643, "EVAP-

ORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
J
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-II M
vice port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
SEF462UA

[VQ]
3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister
vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system.
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system
until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to
0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
pump.
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-643, "EVAP-
ORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
BBIA0591E

[VQ]
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) PFP:00032
A
EC
PBIB1068E
G
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
H
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged I
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: J
● Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. K
CAUTION:
● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
– Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely. L
– Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to Fuel Pressure Release, EC-690, "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE" .
– Disconnect battery negative cable. M
● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LK9
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.

attached.
sor attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
BBIA0558E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

>> GO TO 4.


OK or NG

[VQ]
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING. A
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC
attached.
sor attached. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3. F
No >> GO TO 5.
H
BBIA0558E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I

J
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

L
5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES

M
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE

Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.

[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE

Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I

Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II

1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
SEF665U
Component Inspection UBS00LKA
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

With CONSULT-II
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.

[VQ]
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. A
EC
BBIA0568E
G
Without CONSULT-II
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: H
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
I
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. J
Always replace O-ring with new one. K
L
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
BBIA0568E

[VQ]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
Description UBS00LKB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SEC921C
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection UBS00LKC
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E

[VQ]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. A
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
EC
S-ET277
D

NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
[VQ]
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) PFP:25386
Description UBS00LKD
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-119, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem-NATS)" .
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is dis-
played before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system
and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be SEF543X
carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS
(NATS) initialization and all NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, IVIS/NVIS.

[VQ]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
A
Introduction UBS00LKE
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: EC
Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979
C
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979 D
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979 E
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
F
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × × × × —
G
GST × × × — × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. H
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-701 .)
I
Two Trip Detection Logic UBS00LKF
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> J
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed K
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
L
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying M
up up ing

lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - × — — — — — × —
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - — — × — — × — —
One trip detection diagnoses
— × — — × — — —
(Refer to EC-658 .)
Except above — — — × — × × —

[VQ]
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
Emission-related Diagnostic Information UBS00LKG
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit Trip MIL
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 page
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
1 (A/T) × (A/T)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*5 — —
2 (M/T) — (M/T)
EC-766
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 — — 2 — EC-766

CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 — — 1 × EC-769
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — Flashing*7 EC-673
MAY BE REQUIRED.
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — × 2 × EC-775
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — × 2 × EC-775
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — × 2 × EC-783
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — × 2 × EC-783
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 — × 2 × EC-775
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 — × 2 × EC-775
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 — × 2 × EC-783
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 — × 2 × EC-783
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-820
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-820
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-825
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-825
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — 2 × EC-832
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — 2 × EC-835
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — 2 × EC-838
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — × 2 × EC-840
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — × 2 × EC-849
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — × 2 × EC-857
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 × × 2 × EC-865
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × × 2 × EC-877
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × × 2 × EC-889
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-903

[VQ]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference A
(CONSULT-II screen terms) page
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 — × 2 × EC-840 EC
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 — × 2 × EC-849
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 — × 2 × EC-857
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 × × 2 × EC-865 C
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 × × 2 × EC-877
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 × × 2 × EC-889
D
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × × 2 × EC-903
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — 2 × EC-927 E
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — — 2 × EC-927
F
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — 2 × EC-938
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — 2 × EC-943 G
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-947
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-947
H
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 2 × EC-954
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 2 × EC-954
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — 2 × EC-954 I
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 2 × EC-954
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — 2 × EC-954
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — 2 × EC-954
J
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — 2 × EC-954
K
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 P0333 0333 — — 2 — EC-962 L
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-967
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-974
M
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — — 2 × EC-974
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × 2 × EC-989
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × 2 × EC-995

[VQ]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — — 2 × EC-1048
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4 × 2 × EC-1055
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — 2 × EC-1064
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — 2 × EC-1066
FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — 2 × EC-1068
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* 6 P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-1070

ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — 2 × EC-1072
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — 2 × EC-1074
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — 2 — EC-1076
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 — — 2 × EC-1081
ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-1085
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 — — 1 × EC-1088
TCM P0700 0700 — — 1 × AT-105
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — 2 × AT-106
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — 2 × AT-128
TURBINE REV S/CIRC P0717 0717 — — 2 × AT-110
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6 P0720 0720 — — 2 × AT-112

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — 2 × AT-119
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — 2 × AT-121
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — 2 × AT-123
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — — 2 × EC-1093
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — 1 × EC-1099
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — — 1 × EC-1099
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — 2 — EC-1100
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — 2 — EC-1101
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-1102
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-1113
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-1115
COLD START CONTROL P1421 1421 — — 2 × EC-1117
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — 1 — EC-1147
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — 1 — EC-1154
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — 1 — EC-1167
P1610 -
NATS MALFUNCTION 1610 - 1615 — — 2 — EC-656
P1615
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 — — 2 — EC-1169
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — — 1 × AT-135

[VQ]
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference A
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — — 1 × AT-140 EC
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 — — 1 × AT-142
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1759 1759 — — 1 × AT-146 C
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — — 1 × AT-148
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 — — 1 × AT-150
D
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — — 1 × AT-152
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 — — 1 × AT-154
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — — 1 × AT-156 E
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — — 1 × AT-158
VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 — — 2 — EC-1170
F
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-1175
ETC MOT PWR P2100 2100 — — 1 × EC-1180
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P2101 2101 — — 1 × EC-1186 G
ETC MOT PWR P2103 2103 — — 1 × EC-1180
ETC MOT P2118 2118 — — 1 × EC-1192
H
ETC ACTR P2119 2119 — — 1 × EC-1197
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-1199
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-1199 I
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-1205
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-1205
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-1212
J
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-1219
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — × 2 × EC-1226
K
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P2A03 2A03 — × 2 × EC-1226
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. L
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC need CONSULT-II.
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. M
*7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-665, "How to Display SRT Status"
.
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-671, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

[VQ]
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-658, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-694, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Con-
firmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-728, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.

[VQ]
Priority Items
A
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
EC
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated C
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st D
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem- E
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-671, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE F
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com- G
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. H
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's I
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem- J
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the K
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and L
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item M
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Perfor-
Corresponding DTC
(CONSULT-II indica- mance Pri- Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
No.
tion) ority*1
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
EVAP SYSTEM 1 EVAP control system P0442
2 EVAP control system P0456
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137, P0157
HO2S 1
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-II.

[VQ]
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL ON)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.

[VQ]
EC
PBIB2320E
*1 EC-662 *2 EC-665 *3 EC-666
How to Display SRT Status

WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
NOTE:
Though displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SEF935Z
SRT item.

[VQ]
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself can no be displayed while only SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
PBIB2317E
How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-663, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

[VQ]
Driving Pattern
A
EC
PBIB2906E

[VQ]
● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
● Sea level
● Flat road
● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
● Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
● replace the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed
from 90km/h (56MPH) to 0km/h (0MPH).
Pattern 4:
● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-
state driving.
● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all
over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for PBIB2244E
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models

Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
For quick acceleration in low altitude
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
areas and high altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd 21 (13) 17 (11) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 38 (24) 27 (17) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 53 (33) 40 (25) 64 (40)
4th to 5th 69 (43) 51 (32) 72 (45)
6th 77 (48) 72 (45) 80 (50)

[VQ]
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. A
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high-
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi-
tions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
EC
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
Gear km/h (MPH)
1st 56 (35) C
2nd 96 (60)
3rd 136 (85)
4th — D
5th —
6th —
E
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while F
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis- G
played on the GST screen.
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC play) Test limit Conversion H
TID CID
P0420 01H 01H Max. 1/128
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1)
P0420 02H 81H Min. 1 I
CATALYST
P0430 03H 02H Max. 1/128
Three way catalyst function (Bank 2)
P0430 04H 82H Min. 1
J
EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2
EVAP
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20 mV
SYSTEM
EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 K

[VQ]
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC play) Test limit Conversion
TID CID
P0131 41H 8EH Min. 5mV
P0132 42H 0EH Max. 5mV
P2A00 43H 0EH Max. 0.002
P2A00 44H 8EH Min. 0.002
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 1)
P0133 45H 8EH Min. 0.004
P0130 46H 0EH Max. 5mV
P0130 47H 8EH Min. 5mV
P0133 48H 8EH Min. 0.004
P0151 4CH 8FH Min. 5mV
P0152 4DH 0FH Max. 5mV
P2A03 4EH 0FH Max. 0.002
P2A03 4FH 8FH Min. 0.002
HO2S Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 2)
P0153 50H 8FH Min. 0.004
P0150 51H 0FH Max. 5mV
P0150 52H 8FH Min. 5mV
P0153 53H 8FH Min. 0.004
P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500 ms
P0137 1AH 86H Min. 10 mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)
P0138 1BH 06H Max. 10 mV
P0138 1CH 06H Max. 10mV
P0159 21H 87H Min. 10 mV/500 ms
P0157 22H 87H Min. 10 mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2)
P0158 23H 07H Max. 10 mV
P0158 24H 07H Max. 10mV
P0032 57H 10H Max. 5 mV
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)
P0031 58H 90H Min. 5 mV
P0052 59H 11H Max. 5 mV
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2)
HO2S P0051 5AH 91H Min. 5 mV
HEATER P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20 mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1)
P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20 mV
P0058 2FH 0BH Max. 20 mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2)
P0057 30H 8BH Min. 20 mV

[VQ]
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC A
With CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. EC
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individ-
ually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE: C
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-619 ), skip steps 2 through 4.
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. D
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” E
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. F
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
SCIA5671E
With GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-619 ), skip step 2.
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

[VQ]
2. Perform AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased.)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-619 ), skip step 2.
2. Perform AT-42, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-673, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) UBS00LKH
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-31, "WARNING LAMPS"
, or see EC-1297 .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U

[VQ]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions. A
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
EC
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
ON position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
C
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip E
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
F
the 1st trip.
● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
● One trip detection diagnoses
G
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
I
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is J
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means K
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
L
MIL Flashing Without DTC

M
When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-665, "How to Dis-
play SRT Status" .
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.

[VQ]
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this
10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For
the details, refer to EC-666, "How to Set SRT Code".
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
PBIB0092E

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-673, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-
31, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-1297 .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-

[VQ]
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code. A
EC
PBIB3005E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated K
by the number of ten flashes. The “A” is indicated by the number of eleven flash. The length of time the
1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second)
cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle. L
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF. M
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-619, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
673, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart UBS00LKI
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-657, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .

[VQ]
● The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-678 .
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see EC-680 .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

[VQ]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
EC
SEF392S
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
freeze frame data will be cleared. without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.

[VQ]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-
TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.

[VQ]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
EC
SEF393SD
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.

[VQ]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern A>
AEC574
● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).

[VQ]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
A
Basic Inspection UBS00LKJ
1. INSPECTION START
EC
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
C
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections D
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket E
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U
– Air conditioner switch is OFF. F

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
G
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
H
J
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load. K
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
M
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.

[VQ]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
PBIA8513J

SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 5.

>> GO TO 6.

[VQ]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 7.
2. GO TO 4. C

D
With CONSULT-II
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
A/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) H
SEF174Y
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J

● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-974 . K
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-967 .
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 9.
2. GO TO 4.
M
BL-119, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
>> GO TO 4.

[VQ]
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-686, "IGNITION TIMING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 11.
BBIA0531E

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.

>> GO TO 13.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
2. GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
A/T: 625± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.

[VQ]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN A
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-686, "IGNITION TIMING" . EC

A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 16. D
BBIA0531E E

F
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-166, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. G
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H

● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-974 . I
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-967 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. J
2. GO TO 4.
K
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but L
BL-119, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
M
>> GO TO 4.
19. INSPECTION END

Did you replace the ECM, referring this Basic Inspection Procedure?
Yes or No
Yes >> 1. Perform EC-687, "VIN Registration" .
2. INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check UBS00LKK
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
BBIA0530E
2. Check ignition timing.
BBIA0531E
Method B
1. Remove No. 4 ignition coil.
BBIA0586E

[VQ]
2. Connect No. 4 ignition coil and No. 4 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this A
wire.
EC
BBIA0533E
G
SEF166Y
3. Check ignition timing. H
BBIA0531E K
Procedure After Replacing ECM UBS00S58
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. L

2. Perform EC-687, "VIN Registration" . M
VIN Registration UBS00LKM
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-48, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" .
2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.

[VQ]
3. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display.
PBIB2242E
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning UBS00LKN
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning UBS00LKO
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning UBS00LKP
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started the headlamp will not be illuminated.
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up

[VQ]
– A/T models
• With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi- A
cates less than 0.9V.
• Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
– M/T models: Driver vehicle for 10 minutes. EC
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II C
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. D
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
E
SEF217Z
H
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
K
SEF454Y
L
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If
“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below. M
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Ignition timing M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) MBIB0238E
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
has a malfunction.

[VQ]
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-747, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check UBS00LKQ
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-II

[VQ]
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II. A
3. Start engine.
pressure. EC
SEF214Y
D
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. E
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
BBIA0534E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK H

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector o-ring maintains sealability. I
NOTE:
● Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because D40 models do not have fuel return system. J
● Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-690, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . K
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-131, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. L

● Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pres-

sure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. M
● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pres-
sure gauge adapter.
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for
fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. BBIA0535E
● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel
connection every 3 minutes.


[VQ]
● Fuel pump

9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to zero.
Refer to EC-690, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction UBS00LKR
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con- EC
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac- C
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
E
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are F
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
G
SEF233G
I
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-694 . J
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under K
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the exam-
ple on EC-698 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. L
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.
M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence
PBIB2267E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Detailed Flow
A
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-697, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . EC
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK DTC* 1
1. Check DTC*1 . D
1
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC* is displayed.
1 2
– Record DTC* and freeze frame data* . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.)
E
– Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-671, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .)
– Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus- F
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-702 .)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? G
1
Symptom is described, DTC* is displayed>>GO TO 3.
1
Symptom is described, DTC* is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
H
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.

I
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
J
results.
K
>> GO TO 5.

L
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
M
results.
>> GO TO 6.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1 , and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-699, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
● Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this
check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No >> Check according to EC-757, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION

Perform EC-681, "Basic Inspection" .
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F
ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP value using CON-
SULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-748, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
Are they within the SP value?
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8.
SEF601Z
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-747, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-702, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symp-
tom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection EC
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-
27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Is malfunctioning part detected? C
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-741, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" , EC-716, "ECM Ter- D
minals and Reference Value" .
11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART

E
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment. F
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-671, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
G
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK H

When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure I
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
J
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-671, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION- K
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC-
667, "Driving Pattern" . L
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data. M
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L
● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Worksheet Sample
LEC031A

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
DTC Inspection Priority Chart UBS00LKS
A
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for EC
DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-766, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line D
● U1010 CAN communication
● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor E
● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
● P0128 Thermostat function F
● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
● P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) G
● P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor H
● P0605 ECM
● P0643 Sensor power supply
● P0700 TCM I
● P0705 P0850 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P1550 P1551 P1552 P1553 P1554 Battery current sensor
● P1610 - P1615 NATS J
● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
2 ● P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
● P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
● P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
● P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
● P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
● P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
● P0603 ECM power supply
● P0710 P0717 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767 P1769 P1772
P1774 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
● P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve
● P1805 Brake switch
● P2100 P2103 P2118 Electric throttle control actuator
● P2101 Electric throttle control function
3 ● P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control
● P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
● P0300 - P0306 Misfire
● P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
● P0442 P0455 P0456 EVAP control system
● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
● P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
● P1211 TCS control unit
● P1212 TCS communication line
● P1421 Cold start control
● P1564 ASCD steering switch
● P1572 ASCD brake switch
● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
● P1715 Turbine revolution sensor
● P2119 Electric throttle control actuator

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Fail-safe Chart UBS00LKT
A
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch ON or START.
C
Condition
D
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or START
More than approx. 4 minutes after
ignition ON or START
80°C (176°F) E
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)

F
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. G
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P0223 condition.
H
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a I
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
J
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2119 Electric throttle control (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
K
actuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:) L
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) M
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T), and engine speed
will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P2128 condition.
● When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously
detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit
is open by means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Symptom Matrix Chart UBS00LKU
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-1264
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-690
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-1257
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-642
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-654
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-681
EC-1186,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-1197
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-681
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-1270
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-758
EC-799,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-808
1
EC-820,
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
EC-832
EC-840
3 EC-849
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-857
EC-865
EC-1226
EC-825,
EC-947 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-1113 ,
EC-1115 ,
2 2 EC-1212
EC-1088,
EC-1199 ,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-1205 ,
EC-1219
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-962
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-967
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-974
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-1070

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

F
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-1076
EC-1081,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-1085
G
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-792
cuit
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-1093
H
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit 1 EC-1170
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-1283
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-1255 I
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 MTC-28
BRC-10,
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-47 , J
BRC-93
(continued on next page) K

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel tank FL-12
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-4
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
line, Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-127
Air cleaner EM-127
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-127
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-128
Air leakage from intake manifold/ EM-128,
Collector/Gasket EM-131
Cranking Battery SC-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-25
Starter circuit 3 SC-10
1
Signal plate 6 EM-218
AT-106,
PNP switch 4
MT-62
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-203
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-218
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

F
Valve Timing chain EM-166
mecha-
Camshaft EM-186
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-166 G
Intake valve
3 EM-203
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
H
Gasket EM-133,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
EX-4
Three way catalyst
I
Lubrica- EM-138,
tion Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil LU-24 ,
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-21 ,
LU-22 J
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-18
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-42
Thermostat 5 CO-52
K
Water pump CO-47

Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 CO-54 L
Cooling fan 5 CO-45
Coolant level (Low)/Contami-
5 CO-37
nated coolant M
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System EC-656 or
1 1
— NATS) BL-119

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Engine Control Component Parts Location UBS00LKV
BBIA0536E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
EC
BBIA0596E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
BBIA0597E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
EC
F
PBIB2530E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
BBIA0595E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
EC
PBIB2757E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
BBIA0581E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Vacuum Hose Drawing UBS00LKW
EC
PBIB2529E
Refer to EC-633, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Circuit Diagram UBS00LKX
BBWA2382E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
EC
BBWA2840E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout UBS00LKY
MBIB0045E
ECM Terminals and Reference Value UBS00LKZ
PREPARATION
ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir
tank.
BBIA0537E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Approximately 2.9 - 8.8V

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G ● Idle speed
(Bank 1)
(More than 140 seconds after starting
engine)
PBIA8148J

0 - 14V

4 L/W
(Close) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
PBIB1104E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V
EC
5 L/B
(Open) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
C
PBIB1105E
D
[Engine is running]
following conditions are met
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V E
6 R
heater (Bank 2) minute under no load F
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V) G
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE H
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 12V
I
10 W
solenoid valve (Bank 2) [Engine is running]
J
PBIB1790E
K
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed L
7 - 12V
11 LG
solenoid valve (Bank 1) [Engine is running] M
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
12 P
0.4 - 0.8V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
13 G
(POS)
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1042E
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
PBIB1039E
14 Y
(PHASE) (Bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1040E
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor (Bank 1) Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running] Approximately 1.8V
16 BR A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm fuel ratio.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V) EC
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
at idle
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 SEC984C D
23 SB Fuel injector No. 1 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
F
SEC985C
G
[Engine is running]
24 G A/F sensor 1 heater
43 G (Bank 2) ● Idle speed
engine)
I
PBIA8148J
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the J
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
Heated oxygen sensor 2 K
25 P and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
heater (Bank 1) minute under no load
L
M
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed (11 - 14V)
29 G VIAS control solenoid valve [Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Between 2,200 and 3,300 0 - 1.0V
rpm
EVAP control system pres-
32 W [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
sure sensor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
PBIB1039E
33 L
(PHASE) (Bank 1)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1040E
Intake air temperature sen-
34 BR [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sor
air temperature.
35 O A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air
[Engine is running]
36 W Knock sensor (Bank 2) Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
40 V Fuel injector No. 6 SEC984C
41 R Fuel injector No. 4
42 O Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) EC
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
● Accelerator pedal is not depressed even C
EVAP canister purge vol- SEC990C D

45 R
ume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
F
SEC991C
Sensor power supply

G
Sensor power supply
48 SB (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V H
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
49 P (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V I
sor/Battery current sensor)
● Engine: Stopped J
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
[Ignition switch: ON] K
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed L
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
M
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
55 G – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Bank 2)
56 LG A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.2V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
60 SB Ignition signal No. 5 SEC986C
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1 0.1 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
SEC987C
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
sensor)
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
● Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON
[Engine is running]
71 R Battery current sensor ● Battery: Fully charged* Approximately 2.6 - 3.5V
● Idle speed
73 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
engine coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
74 W – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Bank 1)
75 P A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.2V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
78 GR ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V EC
● Idle speed
0 - 0.2V
● Idle speed
NOTE: D
at idle
79 P Ignition signal No. 6 SEC986C
80 GR Ignition signal No. 4 E
81 G Ignition signal No. 2 0.1 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
F
G
SEC987C
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V H
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground I
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V - Battery volt-
85 W Data link connector
age (11 - 14V)
J
● CONSULT-II or GST: Disconnected
86 P CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the
communication status. K
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
L
91 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the M
communication status.
98 GR
● Engine: Stopped More than 2.0V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2V
Approximately 0V

Approximately 0V
102 PNP switch
● Except above position (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
106 R
Fuel tank temperature sen-
107 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sor
tank temperature.
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
● Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V

(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V EC
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE C
switch ON

ECM ground Body ground D
116 GR ● Idle speed
valve (11 - 14V)
E
120 P (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
(Back-up) (11 - 14V) F
G
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) UBS00LL0
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function H
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data I
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the J
Data monitor (SPEC)
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
monitor K
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance. L
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
M
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × × ×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×
Wheel sensor × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × ×
Throttle position sensor × × × ×
Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × ×

× × ×
sensor
Intake air temperature sensor × × × ×
Knock sensor ×
INPUT
Refrigerant pressure sensor × ×

Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
signal)
Air conditioner switch × ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × ×
Stop lamp switch × × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × × ×
Battery voltage × ×
Load signal × ×
Fuel level sensor × × ×
Battery current sensor × × ×
ASCD steering switch × × ×
ASCD brake switch × × ×
ASCD clutch switch × × ×

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
A
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK EC
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
Fuel injector × × × C
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × ×
Throttle control motor relay × × ×
D
Throttle control motor ×

EVAP canister purge volume con-
× × × × ×
trol solenoid valve
E
Air conditioner relay × ×
Fuel pump relay × × × ×
OUTPUT
Cooling fan relay × × × × F

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × × × ×*3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × ×*3
G
EVAP canister vent control valve × × × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × × ×
valve H
VIAS control solenoid valve × × × ×
Alternator × × ×
Calculated load value × × × I
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data J
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-728 .
*3: Always “COMPLT” is displayed.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE K
Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Start Procedure" .
WORK SUPPORT MODE L
Work Item
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure M
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE When detecting EVAP vapor leak
IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER point of EVAP system
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
● IGN SW ON
● ENGINE NOT RUNNING
● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS-
TEM
● FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
VIN REGISTRATION ● IN THE MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM. When registering VIN in ECM
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-658, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION ITEMS" .
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
CODE
EC-619, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX]
FUEL SYS-B1 ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED [km/
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
h] or [mph]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Freeze frame data
Description
item* A
ABSOL TH-P/S [%] ● The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. EC
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. C
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item D
×: Applicable
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- Description Remarks E
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine
● Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm. F
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● If the signal is interrupted while the
and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated. G
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
is displayed. tain value is indicated.
B/FUEL SCHDL
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injec- H
× tion pulse width programmed into ECM, prior
[msec]
to any learned on board correction.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
I
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback tain value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × correction factor per cycle is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
J
● When the engine coolant tempera-
● The engine coolant temperature (determined ture sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S
× × by the signal voltage of the engine coolant ECM enters fail-safe mode. The
[°C] or [°F]
temperature sensor) is displayed. engine coolant temperature deter- K
mined by the ECM is displayed.
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × × ● The A/F signal computed from the input signal
A/F SEN1 (B2) [V] × of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is displayed. L
HO2S2 (B1) [V] × ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sen-
HO2S2 (B2) [V] × sor 2 is displayed.
M
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
×
[RICH/LEAN] RICH: Means the amount of oxygen after
● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
three way catalyst is relatively small.
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) tain value is indicated.
× LEAN: Means the amount of oxygen after
[RICH/LEAN] three way catalyst is relatively large.
● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
VHCL SPEED SE
× × speed signal sent from combination meter is
[km/h] or [mph]
displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
× ×
[V] played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
● The accelerator pedal position sensor signal
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × voltage is displayed.
ECM terminal voltage signal.
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by
● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
THRTL SEN 2 [V] × displayed.
ECM terminal voltage signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ECM
MAIN
SIG- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● The fuel temperature (determined by the sig-
FUEL T/TMP SE
× nal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sen-
[°C] or [°F]
sor) is displayed.
● The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE
× × signal voltage of the intake air temperature
[°C] or [°F]
sensor) is indicated.
EVAP SYS PRES ● The signal voltage of EVAP control system
×
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is
×
[V] displayed.
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] com- ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is
START SIGNAL
× × puted by the ECM according to the signals of displayed regardless of the starter
[ON/OFF]
engine speed and battery voltage. signal.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS
× × ECM according to the accelerator pedal posi-
[ON/OFF]
tion sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condi-
AIR COND SIG
× × tioner switch as determined by the air condi-
[ON/OFF]
tioner signal.
P/N POSI SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/
× ×
[ON/OFF] neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering sys-
PW/ST SIGNAL tem (determined by the signal voltage of the
× ×
[ON/OFF] power steering pressure sensor signal) is indi-
cated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electri-
cal load signal.
LOAD SIGNAL ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/
× ×
[ON/OFF] or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and
lighting switch are OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
×
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater
×
[ON/OFF] fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop
×
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1
× ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width
[msec] ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
compensated by ECM according to the input
INJ PULSE-B2 tain computed value is indicated.
signals.
[msec]
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
×
[BTDC] according to the input signals. tain value is indicated.
● Calculated load value indicates the value of
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
the current air flow divided by peak air flow.
● Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM
MASS AIRFLOW
according to the signal voltage of the mass air
[g·m/s]
flow sensor.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve control value computed
PURG VOL C/V [%] by the ECM according to the input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT A
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
INT/V TIM (B1) EC
[°CA] ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced
INT/V TIM (B2) angle.
[°CA]
C
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] ● The control condition of the intake valve timing
control solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indicated.
INT/V SOL (B2) [%]
● The advance angle becomes larger as the
D
value increases.
● The control condition of the VIAS control sole-
noid valve (determined by ECM according to E
VIAS S/V the input signals) is indicated.
[ON/OFF] ON: VIAS control solenoid valve is operating.
OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve is not oper-
ating. F
● The air conditioner relay control condition
AIR COND RLY
× (determined by ECM according to the input
[ON/OFF]
signals) is indicated. G
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY
× determined by ECM according to the input sig-
[ON/OFF]
nals. H
● The control condition of the EVAP canister
vent control valve (determined by ECM
VENT CONT/V
[ON/OFF] I
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay con-
THRTL RELAY J
× trol condition determined by the ECM accord-
[ON/OFF]
ing to the input signals.
● The control condition of the cooling fan (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input signals) K
COOLING FAN is indicated.
×
[HI/LOW/OFF] HI: High speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop L
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM
HO2S2 HTR (B2) according to the input signals.
M
[ON/OFF]
I/P PULLY SPD ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the
[rpm] turbine revolution sensor signal.
VEHICLE SPEED ● Indicates the vehicle speed computed from the
[km/h] or [MPH] revolution sensor signal.
● Display the condition of idle air volume learn-
ing
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle air volume learning has not been
[YET/CMPLT] performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already
been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
[km] or [mile]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
A/F S1 HTR (B1) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control
[%] value computed by ECM according to the
input signals.
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
● The current flow to the heater becomes larger
[%]
as the value increases.
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pres-
[V] sure sensor is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
[km/h] or [mph] speed signal sent from TCM is displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
● The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
MAIN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN
CANCEL SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL
RESUME/ACC SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/
[ON/OFF] ACCELERATE switch signal.
SET SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/
[ON/OFF] COAST switch signal.
BRAKE SW1 ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
[ON/OFF] brake switch signal.
BRAKE SW2 ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp
VHCL SPD CUT ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively
high compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
LO SPEED CUT ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively
low compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
AT OD MONITOR ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
[ON/OFF] according to the input signal from the TCM.
AT OD CANCEL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D can-
[ON/OFF] cel signal sent from the TCM.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp
CRUISE LAMP
determined by the ECM according to the input
[ON/OFF]
signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp
SET LAMP
determined by the ECM according to the input
[ON/OFF]
signals.
● Indicates the duty ratio of the power genera-
tion command value. The ratio is calculated by
ALT DUTY [%]
ECM based on the battery current sensor sig-
nal.
BAT CUR SEN ● The signal voltage of battery current sensor is
[mV] displayed.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT A
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● The control condition of the power generation EC
voltage variable control (determined by ECM
ALT DUTY SIG
ON: Power generation voltage variable control
[ON/OFF]
is active C
OFF: Power generation voltage variable con-
trol is inactive.
A/F ADJ-B1 ● Indicates the correction factor stored in ECM. D
The factor is calculated from the difference
A/F ADJ-B2 between the target air-fuel ratio calculated
from A/F sensor 1 signal.
Voltage [V] E
Frequency [msec], ● Only # is displayed if item is unable
[Hz] or [%] to be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width ● Figures with #s are temporary ones. F
measured by the probe. They are the same figures as an
DUTY-LOW
actual piece of data which was just
PLS WIDTH-HI previously measured.
G
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. H
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored Item
I
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item [Unit] INPUT Description Remarks
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
J
● Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signal of the crankshaft posi-
ENG SPEED [rpm] × ×
tion sensor (POS) and camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE). K
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel L
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board range is indicated.
correction.
M
● When engine is running specification
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
× feedback correction factor per cycle is
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] ● This data also includes the data for
indicated.
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injector
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Timing light: Set ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
● Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
● Engine: After warming up, idle ● Harness and connectors
the engine.
● Compression
● A/C switch: OFF
POWER BAL- ● Fuel injector
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Power transistor
(M/T)
● Spark plug
● Cut off each fuel injector signal
one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coil
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors

COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan HI, LOW and Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan motor
OFF using CONSULT-II. ● IPDM E/R

ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel injector
stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay ON and ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay
OFF using CONSULT-II and lis-
ten to operating sound.
VIAS SOL ● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connectors
VALVE with CONSULT-II and listen for sound. ● Solenoid valve
operating sound.
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
FUEL/T TEMP
● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
SEN
stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connectors
TROL/V ● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF sound. ● Solenoid valve
with the CONSULT-II and listen
to operating sound.
● Harness and connectors
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
● Engine: Idle ● Harness and connectors

ALTERNATOR
● Change duty ratio using CON- Battery voltage changes. ● IPDM E/R
DUTY
SULT-II. ● Alternator

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
A
EC

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-663, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT Work Support Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC Work Support Mode
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page
P0442 EC-995
EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
P0455 EC-1048
EVAPORATIVE SYS-
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-1055
TEM
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 P0443 EC-1003
PURG FLOW P0441 P0441 EC-989
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-865
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-840
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/P1289 P0153 EC-865
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 P0150 EC-840
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-889
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-877
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-903
HO2S2
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 P0158 EC-889
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 P0157 EC-877
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 P0159 EC-903
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to D40 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description A
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): EC
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be C
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording D
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... E
PBIB1593E
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and F
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION
MANUAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): G
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though H
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS” in GI-27, "How to Perform Effi-
cient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
PBIB0197E
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function UBS00LL1
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual.
SEF139P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
A
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
EC
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-728, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st
Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored C
Service $03 DTCs
by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This
includes: D
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01) E
● Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
● Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
● Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and Service $07) F
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission- G
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related power train components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine H
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve
open can be closed.
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
● Low ambient temperature
I
Service $08 — ● Low battery voltage
● Engine running
J
● Ignition switch OFF
● Low fuel temperature
● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
K
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE L
2. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the hood opener handle. M
BBIA0538E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-

dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
SEF416S

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor UBS00LL2
Remarks: A
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in EC
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the C
ENG SPEED
tion. tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-747, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-747, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . D
A/F ALPHA-B1
See EC-747, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B2
E
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 2.2V
A/F SEN1 (B2) rpm
F
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi-
tions are met.
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) 1.0V G
– Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load.
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi-
tions are met. H
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
– Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
– Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load. I
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V J
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V
ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V
K
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 056 - 0.96V
ACCEL SEN 2*
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V L
THRTL SEN 1
(Engine stopped)
1
THRTL SEN 2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V M
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF

CLSD THL POS
● Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
the engine Steering wheel: Being turned. ON
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd
Rear window defogger switch and
OFF
lighting switch is OFF

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan: Operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
INJ PULSE-B1 (M/T)
INJ PULSE-B2 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 13° - 18° BTDC
IGN TIMING (M/T)
2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● No load
CAL/LD VALUE (M/T)
2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
● No load
MASS AIRFLOW (M/T)
● No load
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
(M/T) even slightly, after engine starting)
PURG VOL C/V
2,000 rpm —
● No load
INT/V TIM (B1) (M/T)
INT/V TIM (B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
● No load
INT/V SOL (B1) (M/T)
INT/V SOL (B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
● No load
2,200 - 3,300 rpm ON
VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up
Except above conditions OFF
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
ON

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
A
Engine coolant temperature: 97°C
OFF
(207°F) or less
the engine Engine coolant temperature: Between
COOLING FAN LOW EC
98°C (208°F) and 104°C (219°F)
HI
(221°F) or more
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. C
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
HO2S2 HTR (B2) D
at idle for 1 minute under no load
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH) E
speedometer indication
● Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEHICLE SPEED
indication. speedometer indication
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km
F
TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON
turned ON (0 - 40,723 mile)
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100% G
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
● Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
H
● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
SULT-II value. CONSULT-II value
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating I
displayed.
J
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: K
ON
Pressed
OFF
Released L
M
BRAKE SW1 ● Ignition switch: ON
BRAKE SW2 ● Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: pressed at the 1st time
→ at the 2nd time

40km/h (25MPH) and 144km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89MPH)
ALT DUTY ● Engine: Idle 0 - 80%

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
● Battery: Fully charged*2
● No load
● Power generation voltage variable control: Operating ON
ALT DUTY SIG
● Power generation voltage variable control: Not operating OFF
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
*2: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to SC-5, "SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK" .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LL3
A
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF.
C
F
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” G
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
H
PBIB2445E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
PBIB2099E

[VQ]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
A
Description UBS00LL4
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR
(SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in EC
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When
the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may
have one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) E
Testing Condition UBS00LL5
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles) F

2
● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
G
● Transmission: Warmed-up H
– A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
– M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes. I
● Electrical load: Not applied
– Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead. J
Inspection Procedure UBS00LL6
NOTE:
K
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale dis-
play.
1. Perform EC-681, "Basic Inspection" .
L
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II. M
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
SEF601Z

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LL7
OVERALL SEQUENCE
PBIB2268E

[VQ]
EC
PBIB3214E

[VQ]
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-747, "Testing Condition" .
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR
(SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within
the SP value.
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1
minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3. PBIB2369E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2332E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
PBIB2332E

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VQ]
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL A
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE: EC
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con- C
dition.
>> INSPECTION END D

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-690, "Fuel Pressure Check" .) E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-690 . GO TO 8. F
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G

– Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube H
– Clogged fuel filter
– Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-1264 .)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-690 .) I
>> GO TO 8. J

1. Start engine. K
L
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.
M
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E

[VQ]
– Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-1270 .)
– Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-1257 .)
– Intake air leakage
– Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-203, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
● For DTC P0130, P0150, refer to EC-840, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
● For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-1226, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT

Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect
it.
>> GO TO 16.

[VQ]
16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” A
1. Start engine.
each indication is within the SP value. EC
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-702, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . C

D
OK or NG
E
F
G
PBIB2332E

H
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
– Engine oil level is too high
– Engine oil viscosity I
– Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
– Noise from engine
– Noise from transmission, etc. J
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
– Valve clearance malfunction
K
– Intake valve timing control function malfunction
– Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
L
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.

[VQ]
20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-808 .
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.
23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 29.
PBIB2370E
24. REPLACE ECM

1. Replace ECM.
>> GO TO 29.

[VQ]
25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.
D
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the E
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END F
27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 30. I
J
PBIB2370E
28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM K
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
● Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct L
● Looseness of oil filler cap
● Disconnection of oil level gauge
● Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve M
● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
● Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
● Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system
parts
● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.
29. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG

[VQ]
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[VQ]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
A
Description UBS00LL8
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. C
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations

STEP in Work Flow Situation D
2 The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
3 or 4 The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
E
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LL9 F

1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-671, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA- G
TION" .
>> GO TO 2. H
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

I
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT K
Perform GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , "INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS". L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace. M
4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-24, "How to Check Terminal" , "HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS", “How to Check Enlarged
Contact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace connector.

[VQ]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:24110
Wiring Diagram UBS00LLA
BBWA2384E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V C
(11 - 14V)
0 - 1.5V
111 BR E
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
F
120 P (11 - 14V)

[VQ]
BBWA1728E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed

116 GR ● Idle speed D
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LLB
1. INSPECTION START E
Start engine.
Is engine running?
F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
G
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. J
NG >> GO TO 3.
K
MBIB0015E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L

M
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse

[VQ]
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E119 terminal 3
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-1270, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB2658E

[VQ]
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground EC
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
C
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO E
11. PBIB1630E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

F
Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11. H
I
PBIB1191E
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V J

K
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 4.
Continuity should exist. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. M
11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

[VQ]
12. CHECK 20A FUSE
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.


OK or NG

[VQ]
Ground Inspection UBS00LLC
A
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti- EC
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: C
● Remove the ground bolt or screw.
● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
● Clean as required to assure good contact. D
● Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the E
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-33, "Ground Distribution" . F
PBIB1870E L

[VQ]
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
Description UBS00LLD
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LLE
Trouble diagnosis
name
● When ECM is not transmitting or receiving
U1000*1
CAN communication signal of OBD (emission-
1000*1 related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
● When ECM is not transmitting or receiving (CAN communication line is open or
line
U1001*2 CAN communication signal other than OBD shorted)
1001*2 (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or
more.
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic (A/T).
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis (M/T).
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LLF


[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LLG
EC
BBWA2385E

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LLH
Go to LAN-48, "CAN System Specification Chart" .

[VQ]
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
A
Description UBS00OZT
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00OZU
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. D
U1010 When detecting error during the initial diagno- E
CAN communication bus ● ECM
1010 sis of CAN controller of ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00OZV
WITH CONSULT-II F
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-770, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G
SEF058Y
J
WITH GST
K

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00OZW
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
With GST
2. Select “Service $04” with GST.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
[VQ]
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796
A
Description UBS00LLI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve C
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
D
PBIB3279E
J
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid K
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
L
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LLJ

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION M
INT/V TIM (B1) (M/T)
INT/V TIM (B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
● No load
● No load

[VQ]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LLK
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
P0011 ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
0011 ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(Bank 1)
● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
P0021 control performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
0021 ● Timing chain installation
(Bank 2)
● Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for
intake valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LLL
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075 or P0081, first perform trouble diagnosis for
DTC P0075 or P0081. Refer to EC-792, "DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
onds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3.5 msec
SEF353Z
Selector lever
4. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
5. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go toEC-773, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)

[VQ]
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LLM
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP EC
1. Start engine.
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi- C
nated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
KG >> Go to LU-19, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" .
PBIA8559J
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve. H

I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. J

K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. L
NG >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
SEC905C

[VQ]
Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-166, "TIMING CHAIN" .
No >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT

Refer to EM-194, "Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.

For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-969 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-976 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LLN

valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground


CAUTION:
NOTE:
Removal and Installation UBS00LLO


DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ]
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER PFP:22693
A
Description UBS00LS4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
heater control
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air C
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at the specified range.
D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LS5

E
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100%
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
F
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LS6
G
P0031
0031 The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
1 heater control circuit heater circuit is open or shorted.) H
P0051 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
low input
0051 through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
P0032 I
0032 The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
1 heater control circuit heater circuit is shorted.)
P0052 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
high input J
0052 through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LS7 K

NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
M
With CONSULT-II
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
.
SEF058Y

[VQ]
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LS8
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA2843E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G ● Idle speed
(Bank 1)
engine)
PBIA8148J


[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA2844E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
engine)
PBIA8148J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LS9

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or Replace ground connections.

[VQ]
EC
BBIA0589E
2. Turn ignition switch ON. E

3. Check voltage between air fuel ratio sensor 1 terminal 4 and
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB3308E

● Harness connectors E2, F32 J
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio sensor 1 and fuse K

L
4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24, 43 (bank 2) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sen-
sor 1 terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]
5. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LSA
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

1. Check resistance between A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows.
3 and 4 1.80 - 2.44 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 and 1, 2 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.

CAUTION:
● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB3309E
Removal and Installation UBS00LSB
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1


DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
A
Description UBS00LLP
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control C
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, D
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater E
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
F
ON
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LLQ

H
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON I
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
at idle for 1 minute under no load
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LLR
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
name
P0037
0037 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
L
sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
sensor 2 heater open or shorted.)
P0057 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
control circuit low
0057 through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2) M
P0038
0038 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
sensor 2 heater (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to shorted.)
P0058 control circuit high ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
0058 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2)

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LLS
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
4. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm
and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
. SEF176Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LLT
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA2845E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
25 P
[Engine is running]
(Bank 1)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
78 GR ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed

[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA2846E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
6 R
[Engine is running]
(Bank 2)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LLU

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
BBIA0540E

3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. L
NG >> GO TO 3.
M
PBIB0112E

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse

[VQ]
4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0037, P0038 25 2 1
P0057, P0058 6 2 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LLV
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
2 and 3 9.9 - 13.3 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
SEF249Y

[VQ]
Removal and Installation UBS00LLW
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A

EC

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796
Component Description UBS00LSH
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LSI

● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LSJ
P0075
0075 ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
through intake valve timing control solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
P0081 solenoid valve circuit
valve.
0081 ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LSK
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LSL
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA1781E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 12V
11 LG
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V)

[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA2406E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 12V
10 W
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V)

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LSM
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. EC
E
BBIA0553E

F
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
I
PBIB0192E

J
● Harness connectors F26, F125 (bank 1) K
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM
L
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR M
OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VQ]
● Harness connectors F26, F125 (bank 1)
● Harness for open and short between ECM and intake valve timing control solenoid valve

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace mulfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LSN

valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground


CAUTION:
NOTE:
Removal and Installation UBS00LSO


[VQ]
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
A
Component Description UBS00LLX
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire EC
the heat loss. C
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. D
PBIA9559J
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LLY

G
CAL/LD VALUE (M/T)
● No load H
MASS AIRFLOW (M/T) I
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
● No load
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LLZ
K
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM L
A) ● Mass air flow sensor
under light load driving condition.
sensor
● Intake air temperature sensor M
Mass air flow sensor cir-
P0101
cuit range/performance ● Harness or connectors
0101
problem (The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Intake air leaks
B)
under heavy load driving condition. ● Mass air flow sensor
sensor
● Intake air temperature sensor

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LM0

NOTE:
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
With CONSULT-II
4. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
.
SEF174Y
With GST
CAUTION:
With CONSULT-II
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-803, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
4. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
SEF243Y

[VQ]
onds. A

THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V EC
THRTL SEN 2 More than 3V
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
C
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-803, "Diagnostic Procedure" PBIB0199E
. D
Overall Function Check UBS00LM1

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
With GST F
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01. G
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
SEF534P
J

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LM2
BBWA1738E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
● Idle speed
F
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay switch OFF G
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF H
120 P (11 - 14V)
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LM3
1. INSPECTION START
J
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A >> GO TO 3. K
B >> GO TO 2.

L
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ]
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

BBIA0541E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E


[VQ]
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LM4

With CONSULT-II

[VQ]
ing conditions.
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.8
PBIB2371E
4,000 rpm.

Without CONSULT-II
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.8
PBIB1106E
4,000 rpm.


[VQ]
Removal and Installation UBS00LM5
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A

EC

[VQ]
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description UBS00LM6
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
the heat loss.
Therefore, electric current is supplied to hot wire is changed to main-
tain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LM7

CAL/LD VALUE (M/T)
● No load
MASS AIRFLOW (M/T)
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LM8

Trouble diagnosis
name
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 circuit low input sent to ECM. ● Intake air leaks
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LM9
A
NOTE:
EC
With CONSULT-II
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-811, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D
F
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G

With CONSULT-II H
3. Wait at least 5 seconds. I
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. J
SEF058Y
L
With GST
M

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LMA
BBWA1738E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
● Idle speed
F
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay switch OFF G
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF H
120 P (11 - 14V)
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LMB
1. INSPECTION START
J
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2. K
P0103 >> GO TO 3.

L
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ]
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

BBIA0541E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E


[VQ]
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
J
>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection UBS00LMC

With CONSULT-II
M
ing conditions.
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.8
PBIB2371E
4,000 rpm.

[VQ]

Without CONSULT-II
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.8
PBIB1106E
4,000 rpm.

Removal and Installation UBS00LMD


[VQ]
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description UBS00LME
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
to the ECM.
PBIA9559J
E
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359 G
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LMF
Trouble diagnosis J
name
Intake air tempera-
P0112 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
ture sensor circuit
0112 sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors K
low input
Intake air tempera- ● Intake air temperature sensor
P0113 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
ture sensor circuit
0113 sent to ECM. L
high input
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LMG
NOTE: M
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y

[VQ]
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LMH
EC
BBWA1739E

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LMI

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
is built-into) harness connector.
BBIA0541E
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and

ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
PBIB1169E
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
[VQ]
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC

D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00LMJ
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

F
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature G
sensor).
H
PBIA9559J
SEF012P
L
Removal and Installation UBS00LMK

M

[VQ]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description UBS00LML

mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
-10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
CAUTION:
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LMM

Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant tem-
P0117 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
perature sensor cir-
0117 sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
cuit low input
Engine coolant tem- ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
perature sensor cir-
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
Condition
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LMN
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C
D
SEF058Y
F
WITH GST
G

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LMO
BBWA1740E

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LMP

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" . EC
E
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness

connector.
H
BBIA0542E
K
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
M
PBIB0080E

[VQ]
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LMQ

PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
Removal and Installation UBS00LMR

Refer to CO-52, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY" .

[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LMS

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LMT

F
THRTL SEN 1 (Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LMU

H

P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor ● Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.) J
(The APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen- ● Electric throttle control actuator
0123 2 circuit high input sor 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)
K
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
degrees.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LMV
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LMW
EC
BBWA1745E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LMX

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A
EC
D
BBIA0543E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB2604E H


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VQ]
>> INSPECTION END
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LMY

4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
tions.
69
F
step.
Removal and Installation UBS00LMZ

Refer to EM-128, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . H

[VQ]
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description UBS00LN0
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-820, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" .
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
-10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
CAUTION:
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LN1
● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not ● Harness or connectors
Insufficient engine cool- practical, even when some time has passed (High resistance in the circuit)
P0125 after starting the engine.
ant temperature for
0125 ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
closed loop fuel control ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control. ● Thermostat

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LN2
A
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
WITH CONSULT-II C
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 20°C (68°F). D
If it is above 20°C (68°F), the test result will be OK.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. E
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 20°C (68°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-833, "Diagnostic Procedure" F
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LN3
H
I
BBIA0539E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ]
3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-52, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY"
.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LN4

PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
Removal and Installation UBS00LN5


[VQ]
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description UBS00LN6
to the ECM.
PBIA9559J
E
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359 G
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LN7
P0127 Intake air temperature (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
0127 too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor. ● Intake air temperature sensor K
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LN8
NOTE: L
CAUTION: M
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.

[VQ]
b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c. Check the engine coolant temperature.
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 90°C (194°F).
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 con- SEF189Y
secutive seconds.
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LN9

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LNA
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

EC
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature C
sensor).
D
PBIA9559J
SEF012P
H
Removal and Installation UBS00LNB
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I


[VQ]
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION PFP:21200
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LNC
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
● Thermostat
The engine coolant temperature does not
P0128 ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermo-
Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though
0128 stat
the engine has run long enough.
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LND
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-52, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY" .
Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may
come on.
3. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than
60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following
conditions.
SEF176Y
.
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LNE

OK or NG

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LNF
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

EC
D
PBIB2005E
<Reference data> E

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 F
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
G
H
SEF012P
Removal and Installation UBS00LNG


DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 PFP:22693
Component Description UBS00LVI
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen-
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an elec-
trode layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range.
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion layer at
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this cur-
rent relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydro-
carbon density in rich.
Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this PBIB3353E
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of about 800°C
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LVJ

A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00S2D
F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
P0130 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
0130 A) sensor 1 signal is constantly in the range other ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 than approx. 2.2V. (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open
P0150 circuit or shorted.)
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
0150 B) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2V.
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00S2E

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
With CONSULT-II

[VQ]
3. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. A
.
EC
SEF174Y
D
With GST
CAUTION:
With CONSULT-II F
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
G
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 2.2V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-846, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication fluctuates around 2.2V, go to next step.
H
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” (for DTC P0150) of “A/F
SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
I
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
ENG SPEED 1,750 - 3,200 rpm J
K
Shift lever D position with “OD” OFF (A/T)
5th position (M/T)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from L

step 2. SEF576Z
7. Release accelerator pedal fully. M

NOTE:
SEF577Z

[VQ]
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from
step 6.
RESULT”.
SEF578Z
Overall Function Check UBS00LVM

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 5th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the
vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times.
8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
9. Make sure that no DTC is displayed.
If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-846, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LVN
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA2841E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G ● Idle speed
(Bank 1)
engine)
PBIA8148J


[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA2842E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
engine)
PBIA8148J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LVO

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
EC
BBIA0589E

3. Check voltage between air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 terminal 4
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB3308E

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and fuse K

L

[VQ]
4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1 35
Bank1
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Bank 1 Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LVP


[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LUQ
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an elec- EC
C
rent relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydro- D
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the E
(1,472°F).
F
H
PBIB3354E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LUR
I
A/F SEN1 (B1)
Fluctuates around 2.2V
J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LUS

K
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.
P0131
(Bank 1) ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the (The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 cir-
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is con- cuit is open or shorted.) M
P0151 circuit low voltage
stantly approx. 0V.
0151 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LUT
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II

[VQ]
If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-854, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
onds.
SEF581Z

Gear position Suitable position
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4.
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-854, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LUU
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA2841E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G ● Idle speed
(Bank 1)
engine)
PBIA8148J


[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA2842E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
engine)
PBIA8148J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LUV

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
EC
BBIA0589E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB3308E

● 15A fuse

L

[VQ]
1 35
Bank1
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LUW


[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LUX
C
(1,472°F).
F
H
PBIB3354E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LUY
I
A/F SEN1 (B1)
J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LUZ

K
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.
P0132
(Bank 1) ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the air (The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 cir-
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is constantly cuit is open or shorted.) M
P0152 circuit high voltage
approx. 5V.
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LV0
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II

[VQ]
If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-862, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
onds.
SEF581Z

Gear position Suitable position
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4.
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-862, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LV1
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA2841E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G ● Idle speed
(Bank 1)
engine)
PBIA8148J


[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA2842E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
engine)
PBIA8148J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LV2

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws.Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
EC
BBIA0589E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB3308E

● 15A fuse

L

[VQ]
1 35
Bank1
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LV3


[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LVQ
C
(1,472°F).
F
H
PBIB3354E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LVR
I
A/F SEN1 (B1)
J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LVS

K
To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F sig-
nal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operat-
ing (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or L
not.
M
P0133 ● Harness or connectors
0133 (The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 cir-
(Bank 1) cuit is open or shorted.)
● The response of the A/F signal computed by
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Fuel pressure
ECM from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal
P0153 circuit slow response
takes more than the specified time. ● Fuel injector
0153
(Bank 2)
● PCV

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LVT
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” (for DTC P0153)
of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go
PBIB0756E
7. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be dis-

for 10 seconds.
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-
747, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E

If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to
EC-747, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE"
.
RESULT”.
PBIB0758E
WITH GST
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.

[VQ]
● Exhaust gas leaks A
● Lack of fuel
EC
● Fuel injector
● PCV valve
C

5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D
7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. E
F

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LVU
BANK 1
BBWA2841E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G ● Idle speed
(Bank 1)
engine)
E
PBIA8148J

35 O A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air F

G

[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA2842E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
D
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition E
engine) F
PBIA8148J

G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LVV

H
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" . I
L
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
BBIA0593E
>> GO TO 3.

PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
EC
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
C
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
D
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
H
nector.
I
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. J
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? BBIA0541E

K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-915, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-927, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
L
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 6.

[VQ]
BBIA0589E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB3308E

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and fuse

[VQ]
8. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. EC
C
1 35
Bank1
2 56
1 16 D
Bank 2
2 75
Continuity should exist. E

F
Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16 G
2 56 2 75

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13.
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK PCV VALVE

Refer to EC-654, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

[VQ]
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LVW


DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
A
Component Description UBS00LTM

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LTN

HO2S2 (B1) ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi- 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) tions are met. 1.0V
– Engine: After warming up G
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
– Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LTO

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
I
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel- J
cut.
SEF259VA
P0137 ● Harness or connectors M
0137 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
(Bank 1) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
P0157 2 circuit low voltage reached to the specified voltage. ● Fuel pressure
0157 ● Fuel injector
(Bank 2) ● Intake air leaks

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LTP
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF174Y
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” (for DTC P0137) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” (for DTC P0157) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
PBIB2373E
NOTE:
Overall Function Check UBS00LTQ
WITH GST
load.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
procedure.
EC
essary.
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 5th gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this PBIB1607E
procedure. D

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LTR
BANK 1
BBWA2847E

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
D
25 P
E
F
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm G
(Bank 1)
H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground I
● Idle speed

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA2848E

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
D
6 R
E
F
[Engine is running]
(Bank 2)
H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground I
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LTS J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-915 .
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
EC
BBIA0540E
J
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 74 1 1
P0157 55 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 74 1 1
P0157 55 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LTT

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A
EC
PBIB1672E
D
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB2534E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. H
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 I
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. J
Without CONSULT-II
load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. L
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load M
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
procedure.
CAUTION:

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
[VQ]
Removal and Installation UBS00LTU


DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
A
Component Description UBS00LNH

tions.
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LNI

HO2S2 (B1) ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi- 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LNJ
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching
I
time.
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors J
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving con-
dition such as fuel-cut.
K
PBIB1848E M
MALFUNCTION B
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
PBIB2376E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]

An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0138 A)
is sent to ECM.
Heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors
2 circuit high voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0158
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
0158 B)
reached to the specified voltage.
(Bank 2) ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LNK

If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
. SEF174Y
With GST
With CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF174Y
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” (for DTC P0138) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” (for DTC P0158) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
A
EC
PBIB2372E D
NOTE:
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. E
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). F
Overall Function Check UBS00LTH
G
H
With GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. J
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load K
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this L
procedure.
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or M
procedure.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LNL
BANK 1
BBWA2847E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
D
25 P
E
F
[Engine is running]
(Bank 1)
H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground I
● Idle speed

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA2848E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
D
6 R
E
F
[Engine is running]
(Bank 2)
H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground I
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LNM J

K
L
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
BBIA0540E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to ground or short to power in harness or connec-
tors.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1 C
P0158 55 1 2
Continuity should exist. D

E
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1 F
P0158 55 1 2
Continuity should not exist. G

OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER I
Check connectors for water.

Water should not exist. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K

L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. M

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-927 .
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
EC
BBIA0540E
J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1
P0158 55 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1
P0158 55 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LNN

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
EC
PBIB1672E
D
PBIB2534E
CAUTION:
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. J
Without CONSULT-II
load.
ground.
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
procedure.
CAUTION:

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
Removal and Installation UBS00LNO


DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
A
Component Description UBS00LNP

tions.
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LNQ

HO2S2 (B1) ● Revving engine form idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi- 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LNR

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
I
gen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold)
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching
response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the J
SEF302U
P0139 ● Harness or connectors M
Heated oxygen sensor It takes more time for the sensor to respond
P0159 2 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. ● Fuel pressure
0159 ● Fuel injector
(Bank 2) ● Intake air leaks

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LNS
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF174Y
7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
PBIB2374E
NOTE:
If will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
Overall Function Check UBS00LNT
WITH GST
load.
ground.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec-
EC
essary.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec- PBIB1607E
ond during this procedure. D

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LNU
BANK 1
BBWA2847E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
D
25 P
E
F
[Engine is running]
(Bank 1)
H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground I
● Idle speed

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA2848E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
D
6 R
E
F
[Engine is running]
(Bank 2)
H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground I
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LNV J

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-915 or EC-927
.
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
EC
BBIA0540E
J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 1 1
P0159 55 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 1 1
P0159 55 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LNW

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
EC
PBIB1672E
D
PBIB2534E
CAUTION:
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. J
Without CONSULT-II
load.
ground.
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
procedure.
CAUTION:

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
Removal and Installation UBS00LNX


DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LNY
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The EC
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injection D
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) control
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
name
P0171 ● Intake air leaks
(Bank 1) F
● Fuel injector
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
Fuel injection system ● Exhaust gas leaks
too lean ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
P0174 ● Incorrect fuel pressure
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.) G
0174 ● Lack of fuel
(Bank 2)
● Incorrect PCV hose connection H
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LNZ
NOTE:
I
WITH CONSULT-II J
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- K
SULT-II.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. L
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-921, "Diagnostic M
Procedure" .
NOTE:
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF968Y
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.

[VQ]
WITH GST
nector.
detected.
9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go BBIA0541E
to EC-921, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min-
utes. Refer to the table below.

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LO0
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA2849E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G ● Idle speed
(Bank 1)
engine)
PBIA8148J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 SEC984C
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C


[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA2850E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
engine)
PBIA8148J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LO1

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC
E
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G
2. Check PCV hose connection. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. I

[VQ]
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0589E

4. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
1 35
Bank 1
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-691, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) EC
● Fuel lines
C
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR D
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts. E
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling F
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
ground. Refer to EC-799 .
H
With GST
I
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling J
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG K
OK (P0171)>>GO TO 9.
OK (P0174)>>GO TO 11.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or L

M
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E

[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-1257 .
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I

Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect harness connector F44, F101
BBIA0587E
4. Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 3 and

7. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and
ECM as follows.
Harness connector F44 PBIB2633E
Cylinder ECM terminal
terminal
1 2 23
3 1 22
5 4 21

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-1257, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

[VQ]
10. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II A
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows
and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
EC
Harness connector F101 terminal
Cylinder
(+) (–)
1 3 2 C
3 3 1
5 3 4
D
Operating sound should exist. PBIB2634E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. E
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-1257, "FUEL INJECTOR" .
11. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR F

1. Start engine.
2. Listen to fuel injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound.
G
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-1257 .
I
PBIB1986E
12. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR J
4. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-146, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube. L
5. For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2.
6. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. M
7. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injec-
tors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injec-
tors on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. PBIB1726E

[VQ]
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LO2
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The EC
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injection D
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) control
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
name
P0172 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
0172
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Fuel injector
(Bank 1) Fuel injection system F
● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks
P0175 too rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Incorrect fuel pressure
0175
(Bank 2) ● Mass air flow sensor G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LO3
NOTE: H
WITH CONSULT-II I
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- J
SULT-II.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. K
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-933, "Diagnostic L
Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, perform- M
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF968Y
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below.

[VQ]
If engine starts, go to EC-933, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs
and check for fouling, etc.
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
nector.
detected.
8. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go BBIA0541E
to EC-933, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If engine starts, go to EC-933, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs
and check for fouling, etc.

[VQ]
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA2849E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G ● Idle speed
(Bank 1)
engine)
PBIA8148J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 SEC984C
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C


[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA2850E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
engine)
PBIA8148J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LO5

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC
E
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
I

[VQ]
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0589E

Bank 1 1 35
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]
● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-1264, "FUEL PUMP" .)
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-691, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) EC

C
With CONSULT-II D
E
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 8.
ground. Refer to EC-799 . G

H
With GST
I
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
J
OK or NG
OK (P0172)>>GO TO 9.
OK (P0175)>>GO TO 11.
K
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR L
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. M
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

[VQ]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect harness connector F44, F101
BBIA0587E

ECM as follows.
terminal
1 2 23
3 1 22
5 4 21

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II

Cylinder
(+) (–)
1 3 2
3 3 1
5 3 4
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

[VQ]
11. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR A
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to fuel injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound.
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. C
EC-1257 .
D
PBIB1986E
12. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR E
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
F
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. G
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector. H
OK or NG
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. I
Refer to EC-757, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J
>> INSPECTION END

K

[VQ]
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description UBS00LO6
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
decreases as temperature increases.
BBIA0545E
<Reference data>
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (fuel tank
CAUTION:
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LO7
Fuel tank temperature
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage sig- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sensor circuit range/
0181 nals from engine coolant temperature sensor
performance ● Fuel tank temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LO8
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
If the result is NG, go to EC-941, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following
step.
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F). SEF174Y


[VQ]
WITH GST
EC

[VQ]
BBWA2396E

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LOA

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
nector.
E
G
BBIA0545E
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
J
PBIB0932E
K
Check the following. L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LOB

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB2663E
Removal and Installation UBS00LOC


[VQ]
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description UBS00LOD
BBIA0545E
E
<Reference data>
F
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 G
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (fuel tank
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LOE
P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is K
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LOF

L
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. M
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LOG
BBWA2396E

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LOH

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
nector.
E
G
BBIA0545E
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
J
PBIB0932E
K
Check the following. L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LOI

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB2663E
Removal and Installation UBS00LOJ


[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LOK

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LOL

F
THRTL SEN 2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LOM

H

P0222 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor ● Harness or connectors
0222 1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.) J
(The APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen- ● Electric throttle control actuator
0223 1 circuit high input sor 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)
K
● Accelerator pedal position sensor.
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
degrees.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LON
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LOO
EC
BBWA1744E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LOP

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A
EC
D
BBIA0543E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB2604E H


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VQ]
>> INSPECTION END
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LOQ

4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
tions.
69
F
step.
Removal and Installation UBS00LOR

Refer to EM-128, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . H

FIRE
[VQ]
FIRE PFP:00000
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LOS
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire
Multiple cylinder misfire. ● Improper spark plug
0300 detected
● Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire
No. 1 cylinder misfires. ● Incorrect fuel pressure
0301 detected
● The fuel injector circuit is open or
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire
No. 2 cylinder misfires. shorted
0302 detected
● Fuel injector
No. 3 cylinder misfires. ● Intake air leak
0303 detected
● The ignition signal circuit is open or
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire shorted
0304 detected
● Lack of fuel
No. 5 cylinder misfires. ● Signal plate
0305 detected
No. 6 cylinder misfires. ● Incorrect PCV hose connection
0306 detected
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LOT
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE:

FIRE
[VQ]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode A
with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC
4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
. C
NOTE:
ing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E
D
time. Refer to the table below. E
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con- F
G
H
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. I
Engine speed Time

Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes J
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
K
WITH GST
L
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LOU
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. M
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING

Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace it.

FIRE
[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
PBIB0133E
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 10.

Stop engine.
1. Disconnect harness connector F44, F101.
BBIA0587E

ECM as follows.
terminal
1 2 23
3 1 22
5 4 21

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

FIRE
[VQ]
EC
Cylinder
(+) (–)
1 3 2 C
3 3 1
5 3 4
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. E
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-III F

1. Reconnect all harness connector disconnected.
2. Start engine.
G
3. Listen to fuel injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
EC-1257 . I
J
PBIB1986E

FIRE
[VQ]
CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Start engine.
pressure.

checked.
8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
portion.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II

3. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded metal portion.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1270 .

FIRE
[VQ]
9. CHECK SPARK PLUG A
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For EC
spark plug type, refer to EM-144, "Changing Spark
Plugs" .
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. C
2. GO TO 10.
D
SEF156I
10. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III E

F
and the grounded portion.
OK or NG G
Spark Plugs" . H
11. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

I
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-203, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. J
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

K
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-691, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . L
At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

● Fuel lines

FIRE
[VQ]
Target idle speed
Ignition timing
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL

BBIA0589E

1 35
Bank 1
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM
and A/F sensor 1.

FIRE
[VQ]
16. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. EC
NG >> GO TO 17.
17. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 C

CAUTION:
D
gen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. E
>> INSPECTION END

F
With CONSULT-II G
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm H
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
I
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 19.
ground. Refer to EC-799 . K
19. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

L
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-702, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. M
20. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC

Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-671, "HOW TO ERASE
>> GO TO 21.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VQ]
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS PFP:22060
Component Description UBS00LOV
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
BBIA0547E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LOW
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.

P0327
0327
(Bank 1) Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor
P0332 input is sent to ECM.
0332
(Bank 2)
P0328
● Knock sensor
0328
(Bank 1) Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor
P0333 input is sent to ECM.
0333
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LOX
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LOY
EC
BBWA2397E

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
15 W Knock sensor (Bank 1) [Engine is running]

Approximately 2.5V
36 W Knock sensor (Bank 2) ● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LOZ
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
3. Check resistance between ECM terminals 15, 36 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor (bank1) terminal 1, ECM terminal 36 and knock sensor
(bank 2) terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
BBIA0547E
NG >> GO TO 3.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VQ]
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" . EC
E
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. F
6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G

2. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J

● Harness connectors F67, F150 K
● Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ground
L
>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LP0
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF111Y
Removal and Installation UBS00LP1
KNOCK SENSOR

[VQ]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
A
Component Description UBS00LP2
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of EC
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change. C
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor D
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
PBIB0562E
E
PBIB2744E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LP3 I

J
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer Almost the same speed as the tachometer
ENG SPEED
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LP4 K
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal L
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0335 Crankshaft position
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
M
0335 sensor (POS) circuit ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
while the engine is running.
● Signal plate
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LP5
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
onds at idle speed.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LP6
EC
BBWA1752E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
13 G
(POS)
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1042E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LP7

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
D
BBIA0590E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIB0664E
H

I
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM J
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground

[VQ]
6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LP8
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A

2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor. EC
PBIB0563E
F
1 (+) - 2 (-) G
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
H
I
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation UBS00LP9
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) J

Refer to AT-242, "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY" .

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
Component Description UBS00LPA
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of

intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft
position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
PBIB0562E
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
PBIB2744E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LPB

● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the Almost the same speed as the tachometer
ENG SPEED
tachometer indication. indication.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LPC
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
for the first few seconds during engine
(Bank 1) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
cranking.
Camshaft position sen- ● Camshaft (Intake)
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
P0345 sor (PHASE) circuit
during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-10 .)
0345
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-10 .)
(Bank 2)
pattern during engine running.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LPD
A
NOTE:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II C
D
onds at idle speed.
. E
seconds. F
. SEF058Y
G
WITH GST
H

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LPE
BANK 1
BBWA1753E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle E
PBIB1039E
33 L
(PHASE) (Bank 1)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm G
PBIB1040E
H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay switch OFF I
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF J
120 P (11 - 14V)
K

[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1754E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle E
PBIB1039E
14 Y
(PHASE) (Bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm G
PBIB1040E
H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay switch OFF I
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF J
120 P (11 - 14V)
K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LPF
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM L
Turn ignition switch to START position.

Does the engine turn over? M
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

[VQ]
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
BBIA0549E
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF481Y

● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R

[VQ]
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
D
E
● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground
F
7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 (bank 1) or 14 (bank 2) and CMP sensor (PHASE)
terminal 2. H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) K

OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
SEC905C

[VQ]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LPG

2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
PBIB0563E

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation UBS00LPH

Refer to EM-186, "CAMSHAFT" .

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[VQ]
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LPI
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. EC
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase. C
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. D
PBIB2377E
P0420 ● Three way catalyst (manifold) F
0420 ● Exhaust tube
(Bank 1) ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not oper- ● Intake air leaks
Catalyst system effi- ate properly.
ciency below threshold
● Fuel injector G
P0430 ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity. ● Fuel injector leaks
0430
(Bank 2) ● Spark plug
● Improper ignition timing H
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LPJ
NOTE: I
WITH CONSULT-II J
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode K
with CONSULT-II.
ture. L
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. M
(158°F). SEF189Y

[VQ]
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
PBIB1784E
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until

“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
PBIB1785E

13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-985, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
SEF535Z
Overall Function Check UBS00LPK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st
WITH GST
load.
6. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank
1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 sec-
onds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-985, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
PBIB1108E

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LPL
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM A
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
L
Target idle speed
A/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M
Ignition timing
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42
Refer to Wiring Diagram for fuel injector, EC-1258 .
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-1259, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1172E

CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Start engine.
pressure.

checked.
portion.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.

[VQ]
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II A
3. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug EC
and the grounded metal portion.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1270 . D
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG

Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-144, "Changing Spark F
Plugs" .
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 9. G
H
SEF156I
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

I
and the grounded portion. J
OK or NG
K
Spark Plugs" .
L
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
3. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
OK or NG
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.

[VQ]
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).

[VQ]
A
System Description UBS00LPM
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform EC
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
H
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP I
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LPN
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
K
solenoid valve stuck closed L
and the circuit
● Loose, disconnected or improper con- M
EVAP control system does not operate prop- nection of rubber tube
P0441 EVAP control system erly, EVAP control system has a leak between ● Blocked rubber tube
0441 incorrect purge flow intake manifold and EVAP control system pres-
● Cracked EVAP canister
sure sensor.
solenoid valve circuit
● Blocked purge port

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LPO
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
PBIB0826E
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.

Overall Function Check UBS00LPP
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Start engine (VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

[VQ]
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor signal) and ground. A
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle
speed and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 EC
minute.
Air conditioner switch ON
C
Headlamp switch ON
Rear window defogger switch ON
PBIB1109E
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm D
Gear position Any position other than P, N or R
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second. E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LPQ
F
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. H
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW I
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser- J
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-643, "EVAPORA-
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
2. Start engine and let it idle. K
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
L
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG
VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V Vacuum M
100% Should exist.
0% Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1678E

[VQ]
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-643, "EVAPORA-
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.
6. Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.

2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT

1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A
and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
SEF367U
3. Check that air flows freely.

OK or NG
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
SEF368U

[VQ]
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
EC
valve opening.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
E
PBIB1678E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR H

I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. J
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION K

Refer to EC-1035, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" for DTC P0452, EC-1041, "DTC Confirmation Procedure"
for P0453.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

[VQ]
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace it.

>> GO TO 14.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LPR
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canis- EC
ter purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. C
PBIB1026E I
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve. L
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
M
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EVAP control system EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
P0442
small leak detected control system does not operate prop-
0442 ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
(negative pressure) erly.
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged

[VQ]
CAUTION:
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LPS
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
placed on flat level surface.
● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select “EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
PBIB0829E
NOTE:
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
SEC763C
WITH GST
NOTE:
1. Start engine.
3. Stop vehicle.

[VQ]
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
5. Select Service $07 with GST. A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LPT

C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
E
SEF915U
G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. I

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. K
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. M

[VQ]
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
EVAP service port.
BBIA0550E
NOTE:
SEF916U

With CONSULT-II
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
PEF917U
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

[VQ]
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and C
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. D
sure in the system.
E
BBIA0591E
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer F
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U
I
Check the following. J
● EVAP canister vent control valve. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. L
9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER M

attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
BBIA0558E

[VQ]
attached.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.

With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB1678E
Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

[VQ]
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. EC
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR C

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 17.
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 18.
G
Refer to EC-643, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. I

J
>> GO TO 20. K
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.

[VQ]
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-22, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
PFP:14920 A
Description UBS00LW4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
C
Battery Battery voltage*1 D
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
E
F
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. G
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the H
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. I
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis- J
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. K
PBIB2057E
M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LW5

PURG VOL C/V
2,000 rpm —
● No load

[VQ]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LW6
solenoid valve
The canister purge flow is detected during the (The valve is stuck open.)
EVAP canister purge
P0443 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
volume control solenoid ● EVAP canister vent control valve
0443 canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
valve ● EVAP canister
completely closed.
● Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LW7
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
PBIB0839E
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LW8
EC
BBWA1751E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
● Accelerator pedal is not depressed even
EVAP canister purge vol- SEC990C

45 R
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC991C
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V)

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LW9
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
harness connector.
E
BBIA0550E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control F

tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2605E
I

J
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R K
>> Repair harness or connectors. L
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG

With CONSULT-II
3. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

[VQ]
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 13. C
BBIA0558E E

F
attached.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
H
I
J
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K

L
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LWA

With CONSULT-II
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between (A) and (B)
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
between (A) and (B)
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB2059E
Removal and Installation UBS00LWB

Refer to EM-128, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

VALVE
[VQ]
VALVE PFP:14920 A
Description UBS00LPU
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC
C
D
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position E
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank F
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. G
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP H
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. I
J
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. K
PBIB2057E
M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LPV

PURG VOL C/V
2,000 rpm —
● No load

VALVE
[VQ]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LPW
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent shorted.)
0444 to ECM through the valve
open ● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent
0445 to ECM through the valve ● EVAP canister purge volume control
shorted
solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LPX
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1015, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

VALVE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LPY
EC
BBWA1751E

VALVE
[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
● Accelerator pedal is not depressed even
EVAP canister purge vol- SEC990C

45 R
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC991C
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V)

VALVE
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LPZ
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A
CUIT
harness connector.
E
BBIA0550E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control F

tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2605E
I

J
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R K
>> Repair harness or connectors. L
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M
OK or NG

VALVE
[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LQ0

With CONSULT-II
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between (A) and (B)
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
between (A) and (B)
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB2059E

VALVE
[VQ]
Removal and Installation UBS00LQ1
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

EC

[VQ]
Component Description UBS00LQ2
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
opened.
PBIB1263E
Control System diagnosis.
BBIA0591E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LQ3

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LQ4
EVAP canister vent ● Harness or connectors

P0447 An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
control valve circuit
0447 through EVAP canister vent control valve.
open ● EVAP canister vent control valve

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LQ5
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
dure" .
E
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LQ6
BBWA1755E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off) D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
E
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LQ7 F

1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II? G
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3. H
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT

I
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. J
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3. L
M
PBIB1679E

[VQ]
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connec-
tor.
BBIA0591E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-

nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0152E

● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM

[VQ]
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING A
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 8.
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. E
Refer to EC-757, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F
>> INSPECTION END

G
Component Inspection UBS00LQ8

With CONSULT-II H
rusted. I
J
PBIB1033E
L
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. M
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between (A) and (B)
ON No
OFF Yes

7. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Without CONSULT-II

[VQ]
rusted.
PBIB1033E
Condition Air passage continuity between (A) and (B)
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes


[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LWC
ter and is used to seal the canister vent. EC
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative C
opened. D
PBIB1263E
Control System diagnosis.
E
H
BBIA0591E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LWD I

J
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LWE

K
L
P0448 EVAP canister vent EVAP canister vent control valve remains and the circuit
0448 control valve close closed under specified driving conditions. ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve M

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LWF
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
5. Repeat next procedures 3 times.
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1028, "Diagnostic Proce- SEF058Y
dure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
PBIB0972E

WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LWG
EC
BBWA1755E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LWH

2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control
valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
BBIA0591E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 6.
BBIA0558E

[VQ]
attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. C

Check the following. D
E
6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR F

2. Check connectors for water. G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 7.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 8.
K
Refer to EC-757, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LWI
M
With CONSULT-II
rusted.
PBIB1033E

[VQ]
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between (A) and (B)
ON No
OFF Yes

Without CONSULT-II
rusted.
PBIB1033E
Condition Air passage continuity between (A) and (B)
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes


[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LQ9

sure increases.
BBIA0591E
H
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LQA I

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LQB

K
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause L
EVAP control system ● Harness or connectors
P0451 ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
pressure sensor perfor-
0451 control system pressure sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
mance M

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LQC
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1032, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
SEF194Y
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LQD

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER

nector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0591E

[VQ]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. EC

For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-1036 .
D
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LQE E
ter. F
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM G
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg) H
I
CAUTION:
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or PBIB1173E J
K

[VQ]
Component Description UBS00LQF

sure increases.
BBIA0591E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LQG

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LQH
EVAP control system ● Harness or connectors

P0452 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
pressure sensor low
0452 sent to ECM.
input ● EVAP control system pressure sensor

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LQI
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
D
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. E
dure" .
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST H
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. I
5. Select Service $07 with GST. J
dure" .
K
PBIB1110E

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LQJ
BBWA1756E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
EVAP control system pres- C
sure sensor
Sensor power supply
D
sure sensor)
[Engine is running]
E
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LQK
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS F

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" . G
J
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR L

nector.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0591E

[VQ]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

SHORT
67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VQ]
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND A
SHORT
2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

E
● Harness connectors E5, F14 F

H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. I

>> INSPECTION END K
Component Inspection UBS00LQL
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

ter.
M
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
CAUTION:

[VQ]
Component Description UBS00LQM

sure increases.
BBIA0591E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LQN

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LQO
EVAP control system ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
pressure sensor high ● EVAP canister vent control valve
0453 sent to ECM.
input ● EVAP canister
● Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LQP
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
D
6. Wait at least 10 seconds. E
dure" .
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. H
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1043, "Diagnostic Proce- J
dure" .
K
PBIB1110E

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LQQ
BBWA1756E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
EVAP control system pres- C
sure sensor
Sensor power supply
D
sure sensor)
[Engine is running]
E
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LQR
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS F

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" . G
J
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR L

nector.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0591E

[VQ]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

SHORT
67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VQ]
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND A
SHORT
2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

E
● Harness connectors E5, F14 F

H
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 11.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

[VQ]
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 13.
No >> GO TO 15.
BBIA0558E

attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.


>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LQS
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A

ter.
Always replace O-ring with a new one. EC
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. C
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
D
CAUTION: E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). F

[VQ]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LQT
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB1026E
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
EVAP control system has a very large leak ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
P0455 EVAP control system leaks
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control sys-
0455 gross leak detected
tem does not operate properly. ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
solenoid valve and the circuit
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
CAUTION:
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LQU
A
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC
properly.
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. C
TESTING CONDITION:
placed on flat level surface. D
● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
WITH CONSULT-II E
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) G
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select “EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II. H
PBIB0829E
NOTE: L
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. M
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it
is displayed, refer to EC-1050, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC
P0442 EC-997, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEC763C

[VQ]
WITH GST
NOTE:
1. Start engine.
3. Stop vehicle.
● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-997 .
● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-991 .
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LQV

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-643, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. C

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. D
>> GO TO 7.
E
Check the following. F
● EVAP canister vent control valve. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. H
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP I

J
L
BBIA0550E
NOTE: M
SEF916U

[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
PEF917U
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-II
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
BBIA0591E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
SEF200U

[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Start engine.
C
2,000 rpm.
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
E
PBIB1678E
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION F
Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine.
H
Vacuum should exist. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13. J

K
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14. L
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE M
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
PBIB1678E

[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LQW
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak EC
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK. C
PBIB1026E I
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con- L
trol valve.
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks M
● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
Evaporative emission ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
P0456 control system very
0456 small leak (negative ● EVAP system does not operate ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
pressure check) properly. ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-

[VQ]
CAUTION:
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LQX
NOTE:
● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi-
cle for more than 1 hour.
– Fuel filler cap is removed.
– Fuel is refilled or drained.
– EVAP component parts is/are removed.
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
PBIB0837E

NOTE:
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-681, "Basic Inspection" .
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.

[VQ]
Overall Function Check UBS00LQY
WITH GST A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
CAUTION: EC
● Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
C
● Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).
vice port.
D
BBIA0550E
2. Set the pressure pump and a hose. G

3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
H
5. Connect GST and select Service $08.
6. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
I
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP J
SEF462UI
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
If NG, go to EC-1058, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K
8. Disconnect GST.
9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. L
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds. M
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LQZ

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]
EVAP service port. EC
D
BBIA0550E
NOTE: E
F
G
H
SEF916U
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK I
With CONSULT-II
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. K
CAUTION:
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres- L

sure in the system.
PEF917U
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

[VQ]
Without CONSULT-II
CAUTION:

sure in the system.
BBIA0591E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
BBIA0558E

[VQ]
attached.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.

● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection E

F
With CONSULT-II G
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. H
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB1678E
K
L
Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

>> GO TO 20.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.

[VQ]
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A
Refer to DI-22, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24. EC

D
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Description UBS00LR0
BBIA0529E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LR1
NOTE:
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
shorted)
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit ● Harness or connectors
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor
0460 noise (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LR2
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
dure" .
SEF195Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LR3

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LR4 E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
F

[VQ]
Component Description UBS00LR5
BBIA0529E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LR6
NOTE:
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does shorted)
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even ● Harness or connectors
0461 range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
tance.
Overall Function Check UBS00LR7
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-12,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-690, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.

[VQ]
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. A
7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-
II. EC
9. Touch ON and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. C
12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. SEF195Y
D
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
WITH GST E
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
F
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-690, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. G
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. H
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LR8 J
Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . L

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LR9
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR


[VQ]
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description UBS00LRA
BBIA0529E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LRB
NOTE:
● If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-766, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
● If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1010. Refer to EC-769, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
0462 low input sent to ECM. (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0463 high input sent to ECM. ● Combination meter
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LRC
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF195Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LRD

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LRE E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
F

DTC P0500 VSS
[VQ]
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
Description UBS00LRF
NOTE:
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communi-
cation line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LRG
shorted)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from ● Harness or connectors
P0500 (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
0500 shorted)
even when vehicle is being driven.
● Wheel sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected item Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
When the fail-safe system for vehicle speed sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
Vehicle speed sensor
(High) while engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LRH
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.

DTC P0500 VSS
[VQ]
onds. A
1,550 - 6,000 rpm (M/T)
ENG SPEED
1,700 - 6,000 rpm (A/T)
EC
5.5 - 31.8 msec (M/T)
B/FUEL SCHDL
6.3 - 31.8 msec (A/T)
C
Except Neutral position (M/T)
Selector lever
Except P or N position (A/T)
SEF196Y
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
D
Overall Function Check UBS00LRI
E
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
WITH GST F
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. G
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LRJ
1. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” I
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" , BRC-47, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" , BRC-93, "TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 2.
K
L
>> INSPECTION END

M

[VQ]
Description UBS00LRK
NOTE:
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LRL
Idle speed control sys- ● Electric throttle control actuator
P0506 The idle speed is less than the target idle
tem RPM lower than
0506 speed by 100 rpm or more. ● Intake air leak
expected
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LRM
NOTE:
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform, EC-688, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LRN
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK A

2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. C
2. REPLACE ECM
D
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to E
5. Perform EC-688, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . F
G
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Description UBS00LRO
NOTE:
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LRP
Idle speed control sys- ● Electric throttle control actuator

P0507 The idle speed is more than the target idle
tem RPM higher than ● Intake air leak
0507 speed by 200 rpm or more.
expected ● PCV system
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LRQ
NOTE:
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform, EC-688, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF174Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LRR
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION A
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
3. REPLACE ECM
F
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to G
5. Perform EC-688, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . H
I
>> INSPECTION END

J

[VQ]
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763
Component Description UBS00LRS
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
BBIA0552E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LRT

PW/ST SIGNAL
the engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LRU

NOTE:
P0550 Power steering pres- An excessively low or high voltage from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0550 sure sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LRV
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LRW
EC
BBWA1757E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel: Being turned.
12 P
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel: Not being turned.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
sensor)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LRX

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness con-
nector.
D
BBIA0552E
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
in harness or connectors. G
PBIB1872E H
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.

[VQ]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LRY

Condition Voltage
Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0126E
Removal and Installation UBS00LRZ

Refer to PS-26, "HYDRAULIC LINE" .

[VQ]
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
A
Component Description UBS00LSC
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the EC
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
C
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LSD
F
P0603 ECM power supply cir- ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
0603 cuit properly. open or shorted.]
● ECM G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LSE
NOTE: H
WITH CONSULT-II I
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. J
ON.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times. K
dure" .
L
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LSF
BBWA1758E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE C
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LSG

D
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
MBIB0026E

● 20A fuse J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
K
>> Repair open circuit in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0605 ECM
[VQ]
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
A
Component Description UBS00LS0
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the EC
engine.
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LS1
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605 G
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE H
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
I
● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A degrees) by the return spring.
● ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LS2
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION K
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
With CONSULT-II M
dure" .
SEF058Y
With GST

DTC P0605 ECM
[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
ON.
dure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
With CONSULT-II
ON.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
dure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LS3
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0605 ECM
[VQ]
2. REPLACE ECM A
1. Replace ECM.
BL-121, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . EC
5. Perform EC-688, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . C
D
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:18919
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LUM

Trouble diagnosis
name
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
(Battery current sensor circuit is shorted.)
(EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source for is shorted.)
0643 circuit short sensor is excessively low or high.
(APP sensor 1)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LUN
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LUO
EC
BBWA1764E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
49 P (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
Sensor power supply
sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 GR
106 R

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LUP

2. Loosen and retighten three ground three screws on the body. Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" . EC
E
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G

connector.
H
BBIA0592E
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
M
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2608E

[VQ]
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-1036
Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-1284
49
Battery current sensor terminal 1 EC-1121
68 PSP sensor terminal 3 EC-1077
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK COMPONENTS
● EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-1033, "Component Inspection" .)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to MTC-16, "REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR" .)
● Battery current sensor (Refer to EC-1124, "Component Inspection" .)
● Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-1080, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH PFP:23006
A
Component Description UBS00LXT
When the selector lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LXU

C
Shift lever: Except above OFF D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LXV
E
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) circuit is open or shorted.] F
P0850 Park/neutral position
switch is not changed in the process of engine ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
0850 switch
starting and driving.
● TCM (A/T models)
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LXW
CAUTION: H
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at I
WITH CONSULT-II
J
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow-
ing conditions. K
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal

ON
L
Except above position OFF
If NG, go to EC-1096, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M

If OK, go to following step. SEF212Y
onds.
dure" . SEF213Y

[VQ]
Overall Function Check UBS00LXX
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known-good data)
Approx. 0
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except above position
(11 - 14V)

MBIB0043E

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LXY
EC
BBWA1867E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
102 PNP switch
● Except above position (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LXZ
A/T MODELS
Refer to AT-43, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and combination meter terminal 17.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and combination meter.

[VQ]
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. D

Check the following. E
● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
F
7. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III G
1. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and TCM terminal 8.
Refer to AT-101, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace. L
9. REPLACE COMBINATION METER

M
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
M/T MODELS
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3
NG >> GO TO 2.

● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ECM
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH

Refer to MT-62, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
[VQ]
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL PFP:22690
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LTV

EC
P1148 The closed loop control function for bank 1
1148 does not operate even when vehicle is driving
[The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is C
(Bank 1) Closed loop control in the specified condition.
open or shorted.]
P1168 function The closed loop control function for bank 2 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1168 does not operate even when vehicle is driving
(Bank 2) in the specified condition. D
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.
E

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
[VQ]
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT PFP:47850
Description UBS00LTW
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LTX
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-
diagnosis.
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control
P1211 ECM receives a malfunction information from unit)
TCS control unit
1211 “ABS actuator and electric unit (Control unit)”.
● TCS related parts
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LTY
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LTZ
Go to BRC-93, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
[VQ]
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:47850
A
Description UBS00LU0
NOTE:
● If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
Refer to EC-769, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . C
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LU1
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self- E
diagnosis.
F
ECM can not receive the information (The CAN communication line is open or
P1212 TCS communication shorted.)
from “ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
1212 line G
trol unit)”. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LU2 H

TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
I
WITH CONSULT-II
4. If a 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1101, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" . K
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LU3
Go to BRC-93, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

[VQ]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
Description UBS00LU4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
Cooling Fan Control

Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
control (Cooling fan relays)
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
PBIB2531E

[VQ]
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line. A
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
LO HI
EC
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF
High (HI) ON ON C
Cooling Fan Motor D
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
Cooling fan motor terminals
Cooling fan speed E
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
Low (LOW)
2 3 and 4 F
High (HI) 1 and 2 3 and 4
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LU5

G
H
the engine ON
I
OFF
(207°F) or less
the engine Engine coolant temperature: Between
COOLING FAN LOW J
98°C (208°F) and 104°C (219°F)
HI
(221°F) or more
K

[VQ]
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LU6
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
● IPDM E/R
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- ● Cooling fan
heat). ● Cooling fan (Crankshaft driven)
● Cooling fan system does not operate prop- ● Radiator hose
P1217 Engine over tempera- erly (Overheat).
● Radiator
1217 ture (Overheat) ● Engine coolant level was not added to the
● Radiator cap
system using the proper filling method.
● Reservoir tank
● Engine coolant is not within the specified
range. ● Reservoir tank cap
● Water pump
● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-1111,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-38, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-20, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check UBS00LU7
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap and/or reservoir tank cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator and/or reservoir tank.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
SEF621W

[VQ]
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II. A
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-1108, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC
SEF646X
D
WITH GST
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below E
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer F
3. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motor G
operation, refer to PG-23, "Auto Active Test" .
4. If NG, go to EC-1108, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF621W

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LU8
BBWA2398E

[VQ]
EC
BBWA1763E

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LU9
1. CHECK COOLING FAN (CRANKSHAFT DRIVEN) OPERATION

2. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates normally.
OK or NG
NG >> Check cooling fan (crankshaft driven). Refer to CO-45, "Removal and Installation (Crankshaft
driven type)" .
2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at each speed (LOW/HI).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-1110,
"PROCEDURE A" .)
SEF784Z
3. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-23, "Auto Active
Test" .
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at each speed (Low/High).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-1110, "PROCEDURE A" .)
4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 137 kPa (1.4 kg/cm2 , 20 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-37, "CHECK-
ING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . PBIB2647E
● Hose
● Radiator
● Radiator cap
● Water pump
● Reservoir tank

[VQ]
5. CHECK RESERVOIR TANK CAP A
Refer to CO-38, "CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. EC
NG >> Replace reservoir tank cap.
6. CHECK COMPONENT PARTS C

● Thermostat. Refer to CO-52, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY" .
D
● Engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to EC-824, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. E
7. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES F

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-1111, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END G

[VQ]
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E120.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 22 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2607E

● 40A fusible link
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
3. CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E122, E124.
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 38, 59 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 20,
cooling fan motor terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 24.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
BBIA0555E

[VQ]
5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor terminal 3 and ground,
cooling fan motor terminal 4 and ground. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR

E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. F
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G

OK or NG
H
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
I
Main 12 Causes of Overheating UBS00LUA

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
J
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille
K
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-24
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level CO-38 L
in reservoir tank and radi-
ator filler neck
4 ● Reservoir tank cap ● Pressure tester 98 - 118 kPa CO-38
M
(0.99 - 1.20 kg/cm2 , 14 -
17 psi) (Limit)
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks CO-37
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-52
lower radiator hoses
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-1102 ).
● Cooling fan (Crankshaft
ON*2 7
driven)
● Visual Operating See CO-45 .
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —

tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving LU-20
reservoir tank and idling

[VQ]
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in LU-20

reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-205
gauge mum distortion (warping)
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-218
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-33, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Component Inspection UBS00LUB
COOLING FAN MOTOR

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Cooling fan motor terminals

Cooling fan speed
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
Low
2 3 and 4
High 1 and 2 3 and 4
SEF734W
Cooling fan motor should operate.

If NG, replace cooling fan motor.

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LUC

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LUD

F
P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- ● Electric throttle control actuator
1225 learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2) G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LUE
NOTE: H
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
J
dure" .
L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LUF

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0554E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LUG


DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LUH

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LUI

F
P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- ● Electric throttle control actuator
1226 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2) G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LUJ
NOTE: H
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
J
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
dure" . L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LUK

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0554E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00LUL


[VQ]
DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL PFP:23710
A
Description UBS00S2F
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started with prewarming up condition.
This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the catalyst and reduces emissions. EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00S2G
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause C
ECM does not control ignition timing and engine ● Lack of intake air volume
P1421 Cold start emission reduction
idle speed properly when engine is started with ● Fuel injection system
1421 strategy monitoring
prewarming up condition. ● ECM D
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00S2H
NOTE: E
● If DTC P1421 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC. F
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II G
H
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is between 4°C
(39°F) and 36°C (97°F).
I
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is within the specified value, go
If “COOLANT TEMP/S” indication is out of the specified value,
cool engine down or warm engine up and go to step 1. J
5. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes.
dure" . K
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00S2I
1. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING M

Perform EC-688, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.

Check for the cause of intake air volume lacking. Refer to the following.
● Crushed intake air passage
● Intake air passage clogging
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part

[VQ]
3. CHECK FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Perform EC-915, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" in DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNC-
TION.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to EC-921, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With CONSULT-II
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-121, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LWJ

BBIA0582E
E
CAUTION:
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LWK

H
I
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LWL

J

NOTE:
K
L
P1550 Battery current sensor circuit (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
sensor remains within the specified
1550 range/performance
range while engine is running. ● Battery current sensor
M
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LWM
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II

[VQ]
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LWN
EC
BBWA1783E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LWO

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
EC
D
BBIA0582E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIB2609E
H

I
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LWP

ground.
BBIA0588E

[VQ]
signal) and ground. A
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. EC
PBIB2617E

[VQ]
DTC P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR PFP:294G0
Component Description UBS00LWQ

BBIA0582E
CAUTION:
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LWR

● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LWS

NOTE:
P1551 Battery current sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sen-
1551 low input sor is sent to ECM.
P1552 Battery current sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the
1552 high input sensor is sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LWT
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V with ignition
switch ON
WITH CONSULT-II

[VQ]
3. Wait at least 10 seconds. A
dure" .
EC
SEF058Y
D
WITH GST
E

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LWU
BBWA1783E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LWV

H
BBIA0539E
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 2.
M

[VQ]
BBIA0582E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2609E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


[VQ]
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. C
NG >> GO TO 7.

E
>> Repair circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace battery negative cable assembly. H

I
>> INSPECTION END J

Component Inspection UBS00LWW

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. K
ground. L
BBIA0588E

[VQ]
signal) and ground.
PBIB2617E

[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LWX

BBIA0582E
E
CAUTION:
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LWY

H
I
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LWZ

J

NOTE:
K
L
The signal voltage transmitted from the ● Harness or connectors
P1553 Battery current sensor perfor- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
sensor to ECM is higher than the amount
1553 mance
of the maximum power generation. ● Battery current sensor
M
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LX0
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II

[VQ]
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LX1
EC
BBWA1783E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LX2

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
EC
D
BBIA0582E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIB2609E
H

I
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LX3

ground.
BBIA0588E

[VQ]
signal) and ground. A
6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. EC
PBIB2617E

[VQ]
Component Description UBS00LX4

BBIA0582E
CAUTION:
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LX5

● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LX6

NOTE:

P1554 Battery current sensor perfor- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
sensor is lower than the specified value
1554 mance
while the battery voltage is high enough. ● Battery current sensor
Overall Function Check UBS00LX7
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the battery current sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 12.8V at idle.
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that all load switches and A/C switch are
turned OFF.
WITH CONSULT-II

[VQ]
2. Select “BAT CUR SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. A
3. Check “BAT CUR SEN” indication for 10 seconds.
“BAT CUR SEN” should be above 2,300mV at least once.
4. If NG, go to EC-1143, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC
PBIB2615E
D
WITH GST
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor E
signal) and ground for 10 seconds.
The voltage should be above 2.3V at least once.
F
PBIB2616E
H

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LX8
BBWA1783E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LX9

H
BBIA0539E
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 2.
M

[VQ]
BBIA0582E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2609E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


[VQ]
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. C
NG >> GO TO 7.

E
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace battery negative cable assembly. H

I
>> INSPECTION END J

Component Inspection UBS00LXA

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. K
ground. L
BBIA0588E

[VQ]
signal) and ground.
PBIB2617E

[VQ]
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
A
Component Description UBS00LXB
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated. EC
E
PBIB2645E
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LXC

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION G
H
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: I
ON
Pressed
OFF
Released
J
K
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LXD

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. L
NOTE:
EC-1085, "DTC P0605 ECM".
M
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
● An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
P1564 ASCD steering ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
1564 switch steering switch is out of the specified range. ● ASCD steering switch
● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is ● ECM
stuck ON.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LXE
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and
5. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds,
then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release
it and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF058Y

WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LXF
EC
BBWA2851E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2V
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LXG

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT A
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
C
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication
Pressed ON
MAIN switch MAIN SW
Released OFF D
Pressed ON
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW
Released OFF
E
RESUME/ACCELER- Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
ATE switch Released OFF
SEC006D
Pressed ON F
SET/COAST switch SET SW
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-II G
H
pressing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V]
Pressed Approx. 0 I
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 1
CANCEL switch J
Released Approx. 4
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 3

switch Released Approx. 4 PBIB0311E
K
Pressed Approx. 2
SET/COAST switch
Released Approx. 4
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M
3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 17 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

[VQ]
5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 16.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace steering switch.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LXH
ASCD STEERING SWITCH A

1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) ter-
minals 16 and 17 with pushing each switch. EC
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]

Pressed Approx. 0 C
MAIN switch
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL switch
Released Approx. 4,000 D
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 1,480

switch Released Approx. 4,000 PBIB3454E
E
Pressed Approx. 660
SET/COAST switch
F

[VQ]
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description UBS00LXI

Refer to EC-639, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
BBIA0560E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LXJ

Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake
ON
BRAKE SW1 pedal: Fully released
(ASCD brake switch) Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or
OFF
brake pedal: Slightly depressed
BRAKE SW2
● Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Slightly
(Stop lamp switch) ON
depressed
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LXK

NOTE:
● If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
● This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h ● Harness or connectors
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent ● Harness or connectors
to ECM at the same time. (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
(The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.)
(M/T models)
P1572 ● Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch
1572 ● ASCD brake switch
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to
B) ECM for extremely long time while the vehi- ● ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
cle is driving ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
● Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation
(M/T models)
● ECM

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LXL
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait EC
● Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be C
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a D
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). E
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights
up. F
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
G
H
dure" . PBIB2386E
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. I

Selector lever Suitable position J
Depress the brake pedal for more than
Driving location five seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned vehicle speed. K
WITH GST
L

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LXM
BBWA1859E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Approximately 0V
● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly E
depressed (M/T)
● Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE F
released (M/T)
G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LXN
A/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I H
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
J
Brake pedal: Fully released ON K
SEC011D
M
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E

[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 7.
MBIB0060E
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

BBIA0560E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

[VQ]
● 10A fuse EC
C
D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. G
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. I
7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. K
BBIA0560E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB1184E

[VQ]
● 10A fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
M/T MODELS
A
With CONSULT-II
EC
C
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
D
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON
SEC011D
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. G
CONDITION VOLTAGE H
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
I
J
MBIB0061E
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
L

[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 10.
MBIB0060E
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

BBIA0624E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0799E

[VQ]
BBIA0560E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. G
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB0857E

● 10A fuse
K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

BBIA0560E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0117E

● 10A fuse

[VQ]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

G
>> INSPECTION END H

Component Inspection UBS00LXO
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions. J
Brake pedal: Fully released. Should exist. K
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, L

SEC023D
M
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Clutch pedal: Fully released Should exist.
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist.

SEC024D
STOP LAMP SWITCH


[VQ]
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
PBIB2285E
Brake pedal: Fully released. Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist.

[VQ]
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
A
Component Description UBS00LXP
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina-
tion meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD EC
control. Refer to EC-639, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LXQ
C
NOTE:
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC D
Refer to EC-769, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . E
Refer to EC-1070, "DTC P0500 VSS" .
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. F
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause G
Name
shorted.) H
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Wheel sensor I
● TCM (A/T models)
● ECM
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LXR
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. K
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LXS

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-43, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" , BRC-47, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" , BRC-93, "TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[VQ]
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:31935
A
Description UBS00N59
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this
signal for engine control. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00N5A

C
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12MPH)
tachometer indication D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00N5B
NOTE: E
● If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
F
G
Refer to EC-967, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)" .
● If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340, P0345, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
P0340, P0345. Refer to EC-974, "DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" . H
The MIL will not lights up for this diagnosis.
Input speed sensor Turbine revolution sensor signal is differ- shorted)
P1715 (Turbine revolution sen- ent from the theoretical value calculated
J
1715 sor) by ECM from revolution sensor signal
(Turbine revolution sensor circuit is open or
(TCM output) and engine rpm signal.
shorted)
● TCM K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00N5C
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM L
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to AT-43, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14955
Component Description UBS00LY0
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
BBIA0569E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LY1

2,200 - 3,300 rpm ON
VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LY2
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve cir- An excessively low or high voltage signal (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
1800 cuit is sent to ECM through the valve shorted.)
● VIAS control solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LY3
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LY4
EC
BBWA1768E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Engine speed: Between 2,200 and 3,300 0 - 1.0V
rpm.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LY5
1. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
BBIA0569E
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II

or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0173E

[VQ]
● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R EC
● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM
C
3. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
4. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. I
NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.

K
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00LY6
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE L

With CONSULT-II
M
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
VIAS SOL VALVE between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
PBIB2505E

[VQ]
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
Condition
between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
12V direct current supply
Yes No
between terminals 1 and 2
No supply No Yes

PBIB2532E
Removal and Installation UBS00LY7
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE


[VQ]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
A
Description UBS00LY8
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LY9

C
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LYA
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. E
● Harness or connectors F
P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
Brake switch shorted.)
1805 extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
● Stop lamp switch
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
H
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
I
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LYB
NOTE: K
WITH CONSULT-II L
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II. M
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LYC
BBWA1860E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LYD
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT E

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. F
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
G
Slightly depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

L
BBIA0560E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M
PBIB2284E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

[VQ]
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop
lamp switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
BBIA0560E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LYE
STOP LAMP SWITCH A

EC
D
BBIA0560E
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. E
H
PBIB2285E
Conditions Continuity I
Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist.
J
3. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.

[VQ]
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
Component Description UBS00LT0
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LT1

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LT2

P2100 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2100 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
P2103 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2103 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL lights up.
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LT3
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST

[VQ]
TESTING CONDITION: A
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II
EC
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1183, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C
SEF058Y
With GST F

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LT4
BBWA1760E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V D
4 L/W E
PBIB1104E F
0 - 14V

G
5 L/B
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LT5
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K

CONSULT-II or tester. L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1171E

[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD- EC
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
C

[VQ]
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
Description UBS00LST
NOTE:
If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or P2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100
or P2119. Refer to EC-1180 or EC-1197 .
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LSU

P2101 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
2101 performance ate properly. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LSV
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when the
engine is running.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LSW
EC
BBWA1759E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

4 L/W
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V

5 L/B
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LSX

1. Turn ignition switch OFF
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I A
EC
Battery voltage C
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I E

F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB1171E
I
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

[VQ]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.


OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
5
4 Should exist
6
4 Should not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

[VQ]
10. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A
the housing. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle C
BBIA0554E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 13. G
Refer to EC-757, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I

J
3. Perform EC-688, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . K
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LSY
L
2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6. M

step.
PBIB2606E
Removal and Installation UBS00LSZ


[VQ]
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
Component Description UBS00LT6
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LT7

P2118 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
2118 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LT8
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LT9
EC
BBWA1761E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

4 L/W
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V

5 L/B
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LTA

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. EC
ECM terminal Continuity C
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
5
4 Should exist D
6
4 Should not exist
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
F

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR K

2. Perform EC-688, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . L
>> INSPECTION END M
Component Inspection UBS00LTB

step.
PBIB2606E

[VQ]
Removal and Installation UBS00LTC


[VQ]
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description UBS00LSP
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LSQ
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. D
Electric throttle control actuator does not func- E
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion.
P2119 Electric throttle control
2119 actuator Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
B) F
not in specified range.
C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode H
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. I
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T), and engine speed will not exceed
1,000 rpm or more. J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LSR
NOTE: K
● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II M
3. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and
4. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T).
8. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T).
9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn SEF058Y
ON.

[VQ]
With GST
With CONSULT-II
4. Shift selector lever to P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/
T).
SEF058Y
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LSS

2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0554E

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LYF

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LYG
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V H

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS I
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LYH J

NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. K
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause L
Accelerator pedal posi-
P2122 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen- ● Harness or connectors
tion sensor 1 circuit low
2122 sor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
input
shorted.) M
Accelerator pedal posi-
P2123 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
tion sensor 1 circuit high (APP sensor 1)
2123 sor 1 is sent to ECM.
input
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LYI
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LYJ
EC
BBWA1747E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 GR
106 R
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LYK

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
connector.
D
BBIA0592E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power G
PBIB2608E
H

I
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82. J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VQ]
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00LYL

conditions.
sensor 1) Fully depressed More than 4.3V

sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 2.0V
MBIB0023E
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

Removal and Installation UBS00LYM
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

[VQ]
A
Component Description UBS00LYN

signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LYO
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS I
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LYP J

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Harness or connectors
P2127 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
tion sensor 2 circuit low (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
2127 sor 2 is sent to ECM.
input shorted.)
L
(The TP sensor circuit shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
P2128 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- (APP sensor 2)
tion sensor 2 circuit high
2128 sor 2 is sent to ECM. M
input ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LYQ
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LYR
EC
BBWA1748E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 GR
106 R
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LYS

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body, Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A
connector.
D
BBIA0592E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIB2611E
H

I
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91. J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

[VQ]
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LYT
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR A

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- EC
conditions.
C
sensor 1) Fully depressed More than 4.3V D
sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 2.0V E
MBIB0023E

F
Removal and Installation UBS00LYU G
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
H

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Component Description UBS00LYV

into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LYW

THRTL SEN 2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LYX

(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted).
P2135
circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135 ● Electric throttle control actuator
mance and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LYY
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LYZ
BBWA1746E

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
More than 0.36V
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed G
● Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V H
● Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LZ0

K

M
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-1
BBIA0543E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2604E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 66. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
Refer to EC-1218, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10. M

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LZ1

4. Set selector lever to D (A/T), 1st (M/T).
tions.


step.
Removal and Installation UBS00LZ2


[VQ]
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description UBS00LZ3

signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LZ4
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LZ5

NOTE: J
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
(The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
or shorted.) L
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
P2138
tion sensor circuit compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
2138 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
range/performance and APP sensor 2.
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
M
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LZ6
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LZ7
EC
BBWA1749E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 GR
106 R
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LZ8

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
connector.
D
BBIA0592E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power G
PBIB2608E
H

I
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with
1.
Voltage: Approximately 5V J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. K
NG >> GO TO 4.
L
PBIB2611E
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 7.

1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminals 4 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 5
and ECM terminal 83.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

[VQ]
10. CHECK APP SENSOR A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. EC
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY C

D
E
>> INSPECTION END
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F

G
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00LZ9
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR H

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- I
conditions.
J

sensor 1) Fully depressed More than 4.3V K
sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 2.0V L
MBIB0023E

6. Perform EC-688, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . M
Removal and Installation UBS00LZA
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 PFP:22693
Component Description UBS00LV4
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an elec-
rent relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydro-
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LV5

A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00LV6
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is mon-
itored not to be shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
P2A00 ● The output voltage computed by ECM from the ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
2A00 air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is shifted to ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 the lean side for a specified period.
● Fuel pressure
P2A03 circuit range/performance ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is shifted to the ● Fuel injector
2A03
(Bank 2) rich side for a specified period. ● Intake air leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00LV7
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SULT-II.

[VQ]
4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. A
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. EC
utes.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1231, "Diagnostic Proce- C
dure" .
SEF968Y
D
WITH GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. E
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- F
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected. G
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. H
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. BBIA0541E
utes. I
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1231, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LV8
BANK 1
BBWA2841E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G ● Idle speed
(Bank 1)
engine)
E
PBIA8148J

35 O A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air F

G

[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA2842E

[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
D
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition E
engine) F
PBIA8148J

G
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LV9

H
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" . I
L
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 2.

[VQ]
BBIA0593E
>> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
EC
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. C
D
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
H
nector.
I
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. J

K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-915, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-927, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
L
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 5.

[VQ]
5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
BBIA0589E
3. Check harness connector for water.

Water should not exit.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB3308E

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and fuse

[VQ]
8. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. EC
C
1 35
Bank1
2 56
1 16 D
Bank 2
2 75
Continuity should exist. E

F
Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16 G
2 56 2 75

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 12.

[VQ]
12. CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR”
3. Make sure that “0” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB3202E
13. CLEAR A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA

With CONSULT-II
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
>> GO TO 14. BBIA0541E

[VQ]
14. CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II. EC
3. Make sure that “0” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
>> INSPECTION END C
PBIB3202E
E
Removal and Installation UBS00LVA

Refer to EM-133, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . F

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description UBS00M05

Refer to EC-639, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
BBIA0560E

Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal:
ON
BRAKE SW 1 Fully released
(ASCD brake switch) Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake
OFF
pedal: Slightly depressed
BRAKE SW 2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00M07
EC
BBWA1864E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V

Approximately 0V
● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly
depressed (M/T)
released (M/T)

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
A/T MODELS A

With CONSULT-II EC
C
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF D
F
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
G
following conditions. H
CONDITION VOLTAGE
I
MBIB0061E
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3. L

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0060E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
BBIA0560E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0857E

● 10A fuse
K

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
BBIA0560E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB1184E

● 10A fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
M/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I C
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. D
E
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON F
SEC011D
H
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the I
CONDITION VOLTAGE J
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
K
L
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
With CONSULT-II
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0060E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
BBIA0624E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0799E
4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. J
BBIA0560E M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0857E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
● 10A fuse
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
BBIA0560E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. G
NG >> GO TO 11.
H
PBIB0117E

● 10A fuse
K
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00M09
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
When brake pedal: Fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should not exist.

SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

Clutch pedal: Fully released Should exist.
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist.

SEC024D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
PBIB2285E
When brake pedal: Fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
A
EC

ASCD INDICATOR
[VQ]
ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814
Component Description UBS00M0A
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that
ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
● CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
● SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of
ASCD setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00M0B
Specification data are reference value.

MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is

between 40 km/h (25 MPH) ASCD: Not operating OFF
and 144 km/h (89 MPH)

ASCD INDICATOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00M0C
EC
BBWA2404E

ASCD INDICATOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00M0D

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION
MAIN switch: pressed at the 1st
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is

between 40 km/h (25 MPH) ASCD: Not operating OFF
and 144 km/h (89 MPH)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-766, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to DI-7, "Arrangement of Combination Meter" .

>> INSPECTION END

[VQ]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
A
Description UBS00M02
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line
from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. EC

C
Rear window defogger switch ON and/
ON
or lighting switch is in 2nd. D
Rear window defogger switch and
OFF
lighting switch are OFF.
● Engine: After warning up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON ON E

HEATER FAN SW
engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00P0F

F
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
G
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following
conditions. H
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON
I
Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. J
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E
K
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
L
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch: OFF OFF M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0103E

[VQ]
3. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION
Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following
conditions.
Heater fan control switch: ON ON
Heater fan control switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1995E
4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Refer to GW-68, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
>> INSPECTION END
5. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-27, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYS-
TEM -" .
>> INSPECTION END
6. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM

Refer to MTC-28, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ]
FUEL INJECTOR PFP:16600
A
Component Description UBS00LZM
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec- EC
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains C
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
D
SEF375Z
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LZN

B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-747, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
G
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2 ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No load
H

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LZO
BBWA2403E

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm E
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 at idle
23 SB Fuel injector No. 1 SEC984C
40 V Fuel injector No. 6 BATTERY VOLTAGE F

(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
G
H
SEC985C
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LZP
1. INSPECTION START
J
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No K
No >> GO TO 7.
L
With CONSULT-II M
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect harness connector F44, F101.
BBIA0587E

ECM as follows.
terminal
1 2 23
3 1 22
5 4 21

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between harness connector F44 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between harness connector F44 and ECM

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ]
EC
Cylinder
(+) (–)
1 3 2 C
3 3 1
5 3 4
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. E
NG >> GO TO 7.
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-III F

1. Reconnect all harness connector disconnected.
2. Start engine.
G
3. Listen to fuel injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound.
H
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.
I
J
PBIB1986E

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ]
7. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
BBIA0546E

4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB0582E

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
9. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

FUEL INJECTOR
[VQ]
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and ECM EC
C
Refer to EC-1263, "Component Inspection" . D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel injector. E

Refer to EC-757, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F
>> INSPECTION END

G
Component Inspection UBS00LZQ
FUEL INJECTOR
1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector. H
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
I
K
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation UBS00LZR
FUEL INJECTOR L

FUEL PUMP
[VQ]
FUEL PUMP PFP:17042
Description UBS00LZS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
PBIB1569E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LZT

ON

FUEL PUMP
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LZU
EC
BBWA1775E

FUEL PUMP
[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LZV

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0563E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E

FUEL PUMP
[VQ]
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 46 and ground with
Voltage: Battery voltage EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
C
NG >> GO TO 12.
D
PBIB2656E
Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
F
5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III G

3. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con- H
nector.
I
BBIA0545E
K
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 sec-

ond after ignition switch is turned ON. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0795E
6. CHECK 15A FUSE

3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse.

FUEL PUMP
[VQ]
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CURCUIT-IV
2. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and IPDM E/R termi-
nal 13.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 8.

● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and IPDM E/R
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
2. Also check harness for short to ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground
11. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.

OK or NG
Component Inspection UBS00LZW
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.

FUEL PUMP
[VQ]
terminals 1 and 3. A
Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
EC
SEC918C
D
Removal and Installation UBS00LZX
FUEL PUMP
E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
Component Description UBS00LZB
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
BBIA0561E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LZC
EC
BBWA2400E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds passed after turn- (11 - 14V)
ing ignition switch OFF
120 P (11 - 14V)

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
EC
BBWA2401E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
60 SB Ignition signal No. 5 SEC986C
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1 0.1 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
SEC987C

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
EC
BBWA2402E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
79 P Ignition signal No. 6 SEC986C
80 GR Ignition signal No. 4
81 G Ignition signal No. 2 0.1 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
SEC987C
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LZD
1. CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
EC
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79,
80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below. C
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
D
E
PBIB1186E
SEC986C
OK or NG F
NG >> GO TO 10.
G
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
H
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-758, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- J
CUIT" .
K
MBIB0034E

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
BBIA0562E
4. Check voltage between condenser-1 terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3 and condenser-1 terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Harness for open or short between condenser-1 and IPDM E/R

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
8. CHECK CONDENSER-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between condenser-1 terminal 2 and ground.

3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D
9. CHECK CONDENSER-1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser-1. F
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

G
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. H
K
BBIA0561E

5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0138E

● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F32

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.

● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM
16. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

>> INSPECTION END

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
Component Inspection UBS00LZE
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR A

CAUTION:
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
C
1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3 D
Except 0
2 and 3
4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. E
6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. PBIB0847E
F
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres- G
8. Start engine.
9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel H
pressure.
11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical I
discharge from the ignition coils. BBIA0534E

checked. J
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm K
16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark L
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
CAUTION: M
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage PBIB2325E
NOTE:
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER-1

IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
3. Check resistance between condenser-1 terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation UBS00LZF

Refer to EM-143, "IGNITION COIL" .

[VQ]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
A
Component Description UBS00LZY
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume EC
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
C
BBIA0564E
H
PBIB2657E

[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LZZ
BBWA1776E

[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
● Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON
F
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION G

2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON- H
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V I
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. J
K
PBIB1188E

L
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
3. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-765, "Ground Inspection" . M
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

[VQ]
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
BBIA0564E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1872E

5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


[VQ]
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
D
F

G
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. H
Removal and Installation UBS00M01
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR I

Refer to MTC-108, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
J

VIAS
[VQ]
VIAS PFP:14956
Description UBS00LZG
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed*
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve
PBIB1822E
When the engine is running at medium speed, the ECM sends the ON signal to the VIAS control solenoid
valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore closes
the power valve.
Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the total length of passage A and pas-
sage B. This long intake manifold provides increased amount of intake air, which results in improved suction
efficiency and higher torque.
When engine is running at low or high speed, the ECM sends the OFF signal to the VIAS control solenoid
valve and the power valve is opened.
Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the length of passage B. This short-
ened intake manifold length results in enhanced engine output due to reduced suction resistance under high
speeds.
Power Valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to
control the suction passage of the variable induction air control sys-
tem. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The
vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid
valve.
BBIA0569E

VIAS
[VQ]
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum A
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil EC
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
C
BBIA0569E
D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00LZH
Specification data are reference values. E

2,200 - 3,300 rpm ON
VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up F

VIAS
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram UBS00LZI
BBWA1773E

VIAS
[VQ]
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE C
● Engine speed: Between 2,200 and 3,300 0 - 1.0V D
rpm.
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF] E
0 - 1.5V
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF] F
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
119 R BATTERY VOLTAGE G
120 P (11 - 14V)

VIAS
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00LZJ

With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
PBIB0844E
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make
sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
BBIA0570E
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine up to between 2,200 and 3,300 rpm and make sure
that power valve actuator rod moves.
OK or NG
NG (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2.
NG (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3.
BBIA0570E

VIAS
[VQ]
2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE A
With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
EC
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check
C
vacuum existence under the following conditions.
VIAS SOL VALVE Vacuum
ON Should exist. D
OFF Should not exist.
PBIB0844E
F
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
G
NG >> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE

H
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. I
4. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2. J
5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition Vacuum K
12V direct current supply Should exist.
No supply Should not exist.
L
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
M
1. Stop engine.
2. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power
valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or dis-
connection. Refer to EC-713, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair hoses or tubes.
SEF109L

VIAS
[VQ]
5. CHECK VACUUM TANK
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace vacuum tank.
6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
BBIA0569E
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II

or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB0173E

● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM
8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

VIAS
[VQ]
9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. EC
NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.

D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00LZK
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E

With CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch ON. F
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
following conditions. G
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

VIAS SOL VALVE between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
H
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
I
PBIB2505E
J
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol-
lowing conditions. K
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
Condition
between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
L
12V direct current supply
Yes No
between terminals 1 and 2
No supply No Yes
M
PBIB2532E
VACUUM TANK
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank.
2. Connect a vacuum pump to the port (A) of vacuum tank.
3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port (B).
PBIB0846E

VIAS
[VQ]
Removal and Installation UBS00LZL
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE


[VQ]
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
A
Wiring Diagram UBS00M0E
EC
BBWA2405E

[VQ]
BBWA1780E

[VQ]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
A
Fuel Pressure UBS00M0F
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing UBS00M0G
Target idle speed No load* [in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T)] 625 ± 50 rpm
C
Air conditioner: ON In P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T) 625 rpm or more
Ignition timing In P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T) 15 ± 5° BTDC
*: Under the following conditions: D
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position E
Calculated Load Value UBS00M0H
Condition Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II or GST) F

At idle 5 - 35
At 2,500 rpm 5 - 35
G
Mass Air Flow Sensor UBS00M0I
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

H
Output voltage at idle 0.9 - 1.2*V
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
I
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor UBS00M0J
J
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor UBS00M0K

K

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 L
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
M
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater UBS00M0L
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater UBS00M0M
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) UBS00M0N

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) UBS00M0O

Throttle Control Motor UBS00M0P
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω

[VQ]
Fuel Injector UBS00M0Q
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.5Ω
Fuel Pump UBS00M0R

Engine Control System PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B ENGINE

Revision: September 2006 EC-1 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-2 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-3 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-4 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-5 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-6 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-7 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-8 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-9 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-10 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-11 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-12 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-13 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-14 2007 Frontier

U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-156 E

P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-165

Revision: September 2006 EC-15 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-16 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-17 2007 Frontier

Alphabetical Index UBS00L29

CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 EC-156

Revision: September 2006 EC-18 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-19 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-20 2007 Frontier

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 AT-112

Revision: September 2006 EC-21 2007 Frontier

● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

Revision: September 2006 EC-22 2007 Frontier

tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

Revision: September 2006 EC-23 2007 Frontier

● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

Revision: September 2006 EC-24 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-25 2007 Frontier

Special Service Tools UBS00L2E

KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor

KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor

(J-44321) Checking fuel pressure

(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connec-

(J-44626) Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

(J-45488) Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine

Revision: September 2006 EC-26 2007 Frontier

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before K

Revision: September 2006 EC-27 2007 Frontier

System Diagram UBS00L2G

Revision: September 2006 EC-28 2007 Frontier

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Revision: September 2006 EC-29 2007 Frontier

Revision: September 2006 EC-30 2007 Frontier

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART I

Revision: September 2006 EC-31 2007 Frontier

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Revision: September 2006 EC-32 2007 Frontier

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

Revision: September 2006 EC-33 2007 Frontier